As SWRS

Central Market
Redevelopment
Architectural Specifications
Souk Wall & Rooflight
Systems Tender Issue
8th June 2007
Central Market Development, Abu Dhabi
CONTENTS
A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................4
A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION................................ 4

A.1001 Specification Format......................................................................................................................................................................4
A.1002 Work Section Categories ............................................................................................................................................................4
A.1003 Supplemental Information ............................................................................................................................................................5
A.1004 Definitions.........................................................................................................................................................................................5
A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc ......................................................................................................................................................6
A.1006 Disclosure.........................................................................................................................................................................................6
A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT............................................................................... 6

A.2001 Project Description ........................................................................................................................................................................6
A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................ 6

A.3100 Descriptive Elements of the Works ...................................................................................................... 6
A.3101 General Requirements ..................................................................................................................................................................6
A.3102 Contractor Responsibility.............................................................................................................................................................6
A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals.................................................................................................................................................................7
A.3104 The Detailed Design ......................................................................................................................................................................8
A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information .....................................................................................................................8
A.3106 Material Preferences......................................................................................................................................................................9
A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances ..............................................................................................9
A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender.......................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4000 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................10

A.4001 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4002 Tender Submittals ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4003 Post Contract Submittals.......................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4004 Samples Generally...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4005 Pre-contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................ 11
A.4006 Post Contract Samples ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
A.4007 Mock-ups....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4008 Prototypes ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4009 Quality Benchmarks.................................................................................................................................................................... 12
A.4010 Shop Drawings ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12
A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals............................................................................................................................................... 13
A.4012 Other Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
A.4013 Review of Submittals.................................................................................................................................................................. 14
A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA.......................................................14

A.5100 General ................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5101 Performance Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5200 Design and Service Life ....................................................................................................................... 14
A.5201 Design Life of Building............................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5202 Service Life of Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5300 Structural ................................................................................................................................................ 15
A.5301 Movements and Tolerances...................................................................................................................................................... 15
A.5302 Dead Loads................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
A.5303 Live Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5304 Deflections .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5305 Wind Loads................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5306 Preceding Work........................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5307 Vibration......................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5400 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5401 Generally........................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
A.5402 Psychrometric Data..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5500 Fire and Smoke Stops .......................................................................................................................... 17
A.5501 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5502 Fire Protection.............................................................................................................................................................................. 17
A.5600 Corrosion Protection ............................................................................................................................ 17
A.5601 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5602 Galvanising Corrosion Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 18
A.5603 Electrolytic Protection ................................................................................................................................................................ 18
A.5700 Earth Bonding ........................................................................................................................................ 18
A.5701 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/2 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
Stage 2 Tender Issue
8/06/07
A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL.....................................................................................................18

A.6100 General Quality Assurance, Quality Control, Testing...................................................................... 18
A.6101 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
A.6102 Testing and Inspection............................................................................................................................................................... 19
A.6200 Statutory Regulations ........................................................................................................................... 20
A.6201 Standards ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
A.6202 Building Codes and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 20
A.6203 Submissions to Authorities ....................................................................................................................................................... 20
A.6204 Design Regulations..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6300 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................................... 21
A.6301 Health and Safety Requirements............................................................................................................................................. 21
A.6302 Damage Anticipation .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
A.6303 Protective Devices ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6304 Protective Measures ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6305 Packing and Crating ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6306 Protection of Glazed Elements ................................................................................................................................................ 21
A.6307 Vermin and Insects...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6400 Maintenance, Training and Replacement Materials ......................................................................... 22
A.6401 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6402 Maintenance Manual................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6403 Training of User’s Personnel .................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6404 Replacement Materials .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6405 Relationship with Health and Safety File............................................................................................................................... 23
A.6500 General Materials and Workmanship Requirements ....................................................................... 23
A.6510 Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6511 Standard of Materials and Quality........................................................................................................................................... 23
A.6512 Health Hazards............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6513 Deleterious Materials.................................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6514 Sustainable Sources of Timber ............................................................................................................................................... 24
A.6550 Workmanship ......................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6551 Skilled Personnel......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6552 Suitability of Structure................................................................................................................................................................ 25
A.6553 Setting Out.................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6554 Project Tolerances Definitions ................................................................................................................................................. 25
A.6555 Compatibility................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6556 Manufacturer’s Instructions....................................................................................................................................................... 26
A.6557 Suppliers........................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
A.6558 Covering Up.................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6559 Cutting, etc. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6560 Deterioration ................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6561 Line and Level............................................................................................................................................................................... 27
A.6562 Method Statements .................................................................................................................................................................... 27

rooflight system.
8/06/07
A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION
[NOTE: The A Section includes requirements for the final full Specification].
A.1001 Specification Format

a) The Specification comprises Sections A to Z and follows the Uniclass (Common Arrangement)
classification system.
b) Sections A and Z provide general requirements applicable to Sections E to X. Sections E to X
detail particular requirements specific to individual trades or elements of the works.
c) The work sections listed herein form part of the Specification with design responsibility and
specification type indicated for each.
d) The types of Specification are as follows:
i) Descriptive (D): The section, when read with the Design Drawings, indicates the visual
intent with which the Contractor must comply when undertaking the Detailed Design. The
Contractor retains full responsibility for completing the Detailed Design and execution of
the works and for meeting the specified performance criteria.
ii) General Requirements (M) The A section of the Specification is drafted to include
requirements for (D)and (P) works to be carried out by the Contractor, outlining the
design and performance responsibilities that are applicable to each situation.
e) No requirement of the Specification shall impose a lesser standard of material or workmanship
than defined in Sections A and Z.
f) The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Conditions of Contract, Instructions to
Tenderers and other relevant documents.
g) Performance criteria where specified shall be considered as minimum standards with which the
Contractor’s proposals shall comply.
h) Sections A to Z shall constitute a single document.
i) Unless stated otherwise, all requirements of this document (and any related document) refer to
work to be provided by, and obligations of, the Contractor and therefore all clauses are
addressed to, and refer to, the Contractor.
A.1002 Work Section Categories

A General Requirements (M)
E50 Pre cast concrete mullions/frames (D)
G10 Architectural Steel. (D)
H11 Roof and Wall Systems (D).
L10 Louvres/Grilles (D).
M21 Insulation and Render. (D)
Z10 Joinery
Z11 Metalwork
Z12 Preservative/ Fire Retardant Treatment
Z20 Fixings/ Adhesives
Z22 Sealants.
Z25 Glass and Coatings.
Z30 Metalwork Finishes.
Z31 Powder Coatings.
Z32 PVDF Coatings.
Z33 Anodising.
Z36 Gaskets.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
A.1003 Supplemental Information

a) Refer to the requirements of the following drawings, reports and supplemental information as
relevant:
i) Planning permission and conditions.
ii) Project Common Tolerance and Movement Document.
iii) Wind Loading Report/Wind Tunnel Test Report.
iv) Acoustic Report.
v) Fire Strategy Report.
vi) Façade Access and Maintenance Report.
vii) Design Drawings.
viii) Structural/Services Engineer’s Drawings.
b) The Design Drawings include a ‘Technical Reference Sheet’ (TRS), which is a directory of
references for elements and systems. This directory shall be used to correlate the Design
Drawings with the Specification. The TRS provides a link between the Specification and the
Design Drawings.
A.1004 Definitions
The following definitions apply to the Specification:
a) "Specification": This document, comprising Sections A - Z inclusive.
b) "Contractor’s Proposals": Drawings, detailed technical specifications, method statements,
calculations and any other relevant information prepared by the Contractor and submitted with
the Tender response, maintaining the design and visual intent, functional, performance criteria
and technical requirements as stated in the Tender documents.
c) "Design": The visual intent prepared by the Architect for Tender purposes, represented by the
Design Drawings and Specification.
d) "Detailed Design": That prepared either by the Contractor (for Descriptive works) represented
by the Shop Drawings and Contractor’s specifications or by the Architect (for
Prescriptive works) showing the full design.
e) "Design Drawings":
i) For Descriptive works: Drawings issued by the Architect, representing the Design for
Tender purposes showing the visual and design intent, scope, layout, principal
dimensions, arrangement of services and structure, technical, function, visual and
aesthetic requirements and where the Detailed Design is carried out by the Contractor.
ii) For Prescriptive works: Drawings issued by the Architect, representing the Design for
Tender purposes showing the Detailed Design, scope, layout, principal dimensions,
arrangement of services and structure, technical, function, visual and aesthetic
requirements where the Detailed Design is carried out by the Architect.
f) "Shop Drawings": Drawings representing the Detailed Design, prepared by the Contractor (or
his specialist sub-contractor) based upon the Design Drawings, showing plans, elevations,
sections and full size details of fabrication, assembly, installation and fixings of the works,
submitted to the Architect for examination prior to manufacture, showing all necessary
information required to fabricate, manufacture and install/construct all elements of the works,
maintaining the design intent.
g) "As-built Drawings": Drawings produced by the Contractor, where required, which show the
works as finally constructed as represented by the Shop Drawings unless otherwise agreed.
h) "Contract Drawings": The drawings listed in the Contract, comprising Design Drawings and
Contractor’s Tender response Drawings agreed with the Architect with which all Shop
Drawings shall comply.
i) "Evaluation": Reviews carried out by the Architect and Contractor between Tender return and
Contract award to agree materials, typical details and critical interfaces to establish
specifications and drawings for Contract purposes.
j) "Inspection": Inspection carried out by the Architect of materials, components, equipment and
installation of the works. Such inspection shall be limited to an inspection of the visual

rooflight system.
8/06/07
appearance only and not to the selection of materials or the Detailed Design or construction of
components and equipment, which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Such
inspections by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract
Documents.
k) "A(a)ccepted, A(a)cceptance or A(a)cceptable": Materials, components, equipment and
installations accepted by the Architect shall be based upon Inspections (as defined above).
l) "Contractor’s Supplemental Information": Documentation produced after Contract award, by the
Contractor, demonstrating that the Detailed Design complies with the Contract Documents.
m) "Inspecting Authority": Competent independent body or association, which verifies compliance
with the Specification.
n) “Testing Authority”: Competent accredited independent testing body or association, which
provides appropriate testing equipment, testing environment and independent testing results
which will be used to verify conformance with the Architect. The Testing Authority shall be
subject to acceptance by the Architect.
o) "works": The scope of work covered by the Specification.
p) "Detailed Design Programme": Submitted by the Contractor, prior to Contract award, showing
the Detailed Design drawing submission dates, sample submissions, prototyping and testing
activities prior to manufacture.
A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc

The copyright in any designs or installation details developed for this project under the Architect's
direction shall be vested in the Architect and may not be reproduced elsewhere without the
Architect's written permission. This will not apply to standard products and designs already in
existence before the date of tender.
A.1006 Disclosure
The nature of the design and construction work performed and any information belonging to the
Architect, with which the Contractor may become familiar, will be treated as confidential and may not
be disclosed without the written consent of the Architect. Do not publish any drawings, sketches or
photographs of the works or building or its construction without the prior written consent of the
Architect.
A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

A.2001 Project Description
Wall and rooflight systems for new enclosed Souk area including finished precast concrete domes for
rooflights.
A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A.3100 Descriptive Elements of the Works
A.3101 General Requirements

Take responsibility for the Contractor Design works within the list of Work Section Categories listed
in clause A.1002.
A.3102 Contractor Responsibility

a) Undertake the Detailed Design maintaining the function, visual requirements, performance and
intent of the Design.
b) Provide detailed proposals, demonstrating compliance with the visual intent and confirm the
provision of fully warranted systems in accordance with the Contract conditions.
c) The Contractor’s proposals shall include drawings, calculations, methods and technical
specifications detailing the proposed materials and systems in order that a technical appraisal
can be made by the Architect.
d) A Tender based on the Contractor’s own preferred design solution may be offered for
acceptance by the Architect provided the performance and visual requirements are fully
satisfied. Any alternative solutions shall not alter the performance requirements, appearance or
visual intent of the Design Drawings and the Specification.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
e) The Specification and Design Drawings may be modified and amended prior to Contract award
to reflect the agreed final scope of the works, materials and systems selected to reflect the
design intent. The Detailed Design shall reflect the Contract Specification and Drawings.
f) The design and visual character of the project is important and shall be maintained. Hence,
there shall be no variation in the final surface finish of similar materials, which shall remain
visually consistent, including colour and texture, regardless of orientation or natural grain within
agreed tolerances and agreed samples.
g) Provide submittals outlined within A.4000 and 1300 of each particular work section.
h) Provide Shop Drawings and technical information to demonstrate compliance with the Design
Drawings and Specification and to complete the detailing as necessary and comply with the
approvals process specified. The Contractor’s final Detailed Design shall be based on the
Design Drawings which indicate generic solutions and may not cover all conditions.
i) Where proprietary products are to be installed, be responsible for providing any modification,
additional bracing, reinforcing, suitable fixings, etc. to ensure that the products meet the
requirements of the Specification for the circumstances and situation in which they shall be
expected to perform. Be responsible for conveying any concerns that the manufacturers may
have expressed regarding the suitability of products for the purpose intended.
j) No portion of the works shall commence without acceptance of the required submittals by the
Architect.
k) Comply with all relevant National Health and Safety requirements including the production and
submission of system Risk Assessment analysis reports.
l) Be responsible for ensuring that items specified are installed correctly such that the
performance requirements specified are fully satisfied for the service life required. All fixings and
other aspects not fully detailed or specified shall be regarded as the Contractor’s responsibility.
m) Be responsible for the final selection of products and associated components, which shall be
used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer; which shall satisfy the requirements
of the Specification.
n) Be responsible for the carrying out of all testing as specified.
o) Co-ordinate with the work of others including all interfacing as required.
p) Provide warranties as required.
q) Submit relevant documents to Building Control as required to comply with the Particular
Requirements sections.
r) Comply with the requirements of Planning Approval.
s) Submit relevant documents to the Local Planning Authority.
t) Set out the works and accurately co-ordinate all related works.
u) Provide details, calculations and any other relevant information to the Architect for submission
to and approval by the local authorities. Make any adjustments required by the local authorities,
following submissions, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
v) In addition to submissions for the Local Authority, be responsible for submitting structural,
deflection and other calculations and technical information, where required (as requested in the
Specification) for review by the Architect. Such submissions shall demonstrate compliance with
the Specification.
A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals

a) The Contractor’s Proposals will be reviewed during the Evaluation period by the Architect.
Attend evaluation meetings as required and make adjustments and alterations to the
Contractor’s Proposals to agree the major design principles to the satisfaction of the Architect
prior to the possible Contract award.
b) Provide the Architect with access to the design office and personnel during the Design
Evaluation period.
c) The Contractor’s Proposals as a minimum shall include:
i) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers.
ii) Pre-contract proposals.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iii) Details of any 'Specialist' involvement.

iv) Details of Working Drawing programme.
v) Samples of proposed materials as required and as listed in the relevant work sections.
vi) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers where different from those specified.
vii) Drawings as listed herein or as deemed necessary to explain the Contractor’s Proposals.
viii) Comprehensive technical specifications of the Contractor’s Proposals.
ix) Relevant supplementary information.
x) Drawings as required by the Particular Requirement Sections or as deemed necessary to
explain the Contractor’s Proposals.
xi) Technical statements confirming performance compliance.
xii) Details of guarantees and warranties including details of predicted service lives for
primary and secondary components.
xiii) Summary of deviations from the Design Drawings and Specification.
xiv) Commissioning information as relevant.
A.3104 The Detailed Design

a) Comply with all relevant Codes of Practice, Standards, Fire Regulations, Local Building
Regulations and local Building Codes, Safety Regulations and any other regulations applicable
to the installation, together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, Bye-laws and other
enforceable instruments applicable to both the design and execution of the works.
b) Prepare a programme for the Detailed Design showing all tasks and submissions and submit for
acceptance by the Architect.
c) Produce Shop Drawings to represent the Detailed Design, supported by calculations for review
by the Architect.
d) Submit, to the Architect, the required number of copies of all design/production information.
e) The Shop Drawings shall finalise all manufacturing, interface and installation details.
f) Ensure that any necessary amendments are made in a timely manner, unless and until the
Architect confirms that resubmission is not required, submit copies of amended drawings, etc.,
and ensure incorporation of necessary amendments.
g) The Specification shall not be altered without the Architect’s prior written consent.
h) Select suitable materials, sizes, thicknesses, types and locations of fixings and sealants, all in
accordance with specified standards and ensure that they are used for the purpose intended by
the manufacturer.
i) Any necessary support structure shall incorporate all movements and tolerances to which it is
subjected.
j) Include descriptions of relevant structural performance principles of the works, including how
and where loads are transmitted to the primary structure and the accommodation of tolerances.
k) Show details of all fixing requirements to interfacing elements of the works, which shall be
agreed with the Architect prior to commencement of the installation.
l) Co-ordinate all interfaces.
m) The Architect’s review of Shop Drawings shall relate to visual performance and functional
matters only.
n) Be responsible for compiling the Shop Drawings and Technical Specifications of any chosen
sub-contractors to ensure that all the contractual obligations are met to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information

a) Provide such additional supplemental information in respect of design, materials, systems,
methods, installation and procedures as required by the Architect after Contract award.
b) Additional supplemental information shall comply fully with the design intent, functional and
performance requirements of the Design.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) Where alternative sub-contractors/suppliers/products are proposed, they shall not be utilised

until written acceptance is received from the Architect.
d) Submit all relevant information sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Specification to
the Relevant Authorities.
A.3106 Material Preferences

a) Where the Specification identifies preferred materials, these shall be confirmed as being
suitable for their specified and intended purpose with the Tender return. If no such specific
confirmation is received, then the submission of the Tender return itself shall constitute such a
confirmation. If the preferred materials are considered unsuitable, advise at the time of Tender.
b) Acceptance of alternative proposals by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility to provide suitable materials, components and assemblies, which shall be used as
intended by the manufacturer and in compliance with the Contract Documents.
c) If, with his Tender, the Contractor submits no such alternative proposal to any of the
preferences indicated in the Tender Documents then the solutions proposed in the
Specification and on the Design Drawings shall be deemed to be acceptable and be warranted
by him.
A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances

a) The Specification together with the corresponding Design Drawings indicate the dimensional
tolerances (hereafter referred to as “tolerances”) to which the Contractor shall work (where
relevant) for the Detailed Design, manufacture, sub-assembly, setting out and installation of the
works.
b) The Shop Drawings shall clearly demonstrate how manufacturing and construction tolerances
are to be accommodated.
c) Take account of various specified tolerances and their effect on the works. Inform the Architect
of any apparent tolerance omissions, inconsistencies or incompatibilities.
d) Maintain the tolerances as defined and demonstrate, upon request by the Architect, the means
by which specified tolerances shall be assured and, where appropriate, which specialist
equipment and/or methods shall be used.
e) All dimensions shall be checked on Site, confirming all dimensions critical to the works. Site
measurements shall be undertaken in sufficient time to enable corrective action to be taken to
the works, or the work of others, to ensure an accurate fit within agreed or implied tolerances.
f) Refer to and take account of the Structural Engineer’s Movements and Tolerances information.
g) Confirm common reference points and agree with the Architect. Carry out dimensional checks
prior to the commencement of manufacture as necessary.
h) Ensure that any dimensions are compatible and consistent with other relevant design
dimensions and accumulated tolerances and movements. State and/or show, on the Shop
Drawings, the provisions made which are intended to accommodate the accumulated
tolerances of adjoining or adjacent trades.
i) Inform the Architect of any work that does not meet the specified tolerances.
j) The works shall be free from deformation outside of specified tolerances and shall not be
subject to warping, twisting and/or perishing but remain stable, firm, free from vibrations,
knocking, rattles and/or whistles, squeaks or other such noises, taking into account known or
specified conditions.
k) Details shall be provided for acceptance by the Architect of the Contractor’s proposed methods
for achieving and constantly monitoring the fabrication and erection tolerances during all stages
of the works. Detailed records of the constant control and tolerance achieved shall be
submitted to the Architect.
l) In the event of there being any discrepancy in the values of existing datum reference points,
datum levels, buildings, foundations or other features to which the works are related, determine
and report such a discrepancy to the Architect and obtain written instructions before
proceeding.
m) The permissible tolerances stated in the Specification shall be progressively checked up to
handover. Where two or more different tolerances can be derived by calculation and/or from the
Design Drawings for the same dimension, the least tolerance shall apply which shall be
confirmed by the Contractor to the Architect. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender

a) Should the Contractor, after consideration of all the criteria which in his specialist knowledge
are relevant to the design and construction of the works, wish to make proposals for changes in
any details, dimensions or materials shown in the Design Drawings or referred to in the
Specification, then such proposals shall be provided as separate alternative options and
returned with the Tender. In no way shall any proposal fail to meet the minimum performance
requirements herein specified.
b) A request for a substitution shall be deemed to be a warranty by the Contractor to the client
that such substitutions meet the requirements of the Specification and as such must be
confirmed in writing as equal by the Contractor and accepted in writing by the Architect.
Admissibility of any request for substitution after Tender shall be at the sole discretion of the
Architect and may be rejected without reason given.
c) In the case that any substitution alters the specified requirements, submit sufficient information
on substituted materials to allow evaluation by the Architect on any deviations from the
Specification.
A.4000 SUBMITTALS
A.4001 Procedure
a) No portion of the works shall commence without acceptance of the required submittals by the
Architect.
b) A schedule of submittals shall be provided for agreement with the Architect. Schedule to
indicate the dates on which the Architect shall receive the required submittals. The schedule
shall be correlated with the master programme and allow a reasonable amount of time for the
review of each submittal. Critical decision dates shall be indicated for selection of finishes and
colours. The schedule of submittals shall be revised and resubmitted as necessary.
c) Provide submittals in accordance with the following:
i) Addressing of Submittals: Submittals shall be delivered to the premises identified by the
Architect.
ii) Identification of Submittals: Each submittal shall be individually identified with the project
name, respective specification reference, supplier's/manufacturer's name and product
reference as appropriate. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a transmittal form
containing similar information; together with the purpose for which the submittal is being
made. Space shall be provided on each item submitted for stamping by the Architect.
iii) Numbering of Submittals: Submittals shall be numbered consecutively and that
numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions and resubmittals.
iv) Completeness of Submittals: All relevant information shall be included within each
submittal to define completely and explain each separate system of work. Submittals may
be combined from various sections as necessary and furnished at one time as a single
submission.
v) Variations and Substitutions: Submittals that differ from the requirements of the Design
Drawings and Specifications shall be so identified.
d) Submission and Return of Shop Drawings/Documents:
i) Allow for the required period between the first submission of a Drawing/document and
receipt of comments. Allow for resubmissions for each item to achieve a Category A or B
Status.
ii) Provide a list of Shop Drawings proposed.
iii) Information specifically requested for each element of the works shall be provided.
Additional information may be required by the Architect on inspection of the Contractor’s
submittals to allow for accurate comments to be made.
e) The Contractor’s submittals shall be reviewed by the Architect during the evaluation period, and
any alteration and/or agreements reached shall be incorporated into the Contract Drawings and
Contract Specification.
A.4002 Tender Submittals

Where called for in the Specification, provide submittals at the time of Tender as listed in the

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Specification.
A.4003 Post Contract Submittals

After Contract award provide Shop Drawings, samples, mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmarks,
calculations, test reports and other relevant data.
A.4004 Samples Generally

a) Samples shall include various products, natural materials, fabricated items, equipment, devices,
appliances or components thereof, as may be required to satisfy the visual appearance and
technical requirements of the Design.
b) Samples shall be reviewed for their visual characteristics only and where moving or operating
elements are involved, the Architect shall be given the opportunity to review working samples.
c) Ranges of samples shall be provided where a considerable range of colour, graining, texture,
smoothness and other characteristics may be anticipated in the works.
d) Where custom colours are specified, samples shall be submitted illustrating precise colours,
textures, patterns and finishes for review by the Architect.
A.4005 Pre-contract Samples

a) Samples provided with the Tender or during the evaluation period prior to Contract award.
b) Samples shall be as listed in the Particular Requirement Sections which are required to verify
the visual appearance of such items for compliance with the requirements of the Design
Drawings and Specification.
c) Pre-contract samples shall be labelled and kept by the Architect as a record of materials agreed
for Contract until completion/handover.
A.4006 Post Contract Samples

a) Samples provided during the Detailed Design shall be checked against the Pre-contract
samples and the Specification to ensure that quality and type have been maintained.
b) At the appropriate time provide the Architect with samples listed in Particular Requirement
Sections, which shall be kept as a record of materials to be incorporated in the works and used
as references for controlling consistency throughout the works.
c) Post contract Samples shall comprise materials in their final form.
A.4007 Mock-ups
a) During the Shop Drawings preparation phase (in due time to permit adjustments to the design)
and where described in the particular Works Sections, the Contractor shall provide full size
mock-ups for inspection by the Architect.
b) Mock-ups shall be erected either on or off Site, not necessarily using actual materials to be
incorporated in the works but representing the design solutions.
c) The mock-up shall be constructed to confirm the general visual intent including colour, size and
co-ordination.
A.4008 Prototypes
a) Prior to manufacture of elements of the works, construct off Site (or on Site if specifically
requested by the Architect) full scale three-dimensional sections where described in the
particular Works Sections and/or shown on the Design Drawings utilising final specified
materials but not necessarily final production techniques.
b) The prototypes shall be tested fully to ensure that the systems meet the performance
requirements of the Specification by application of the maximum applied loads, climatic
conditions and structural movements, and/or be used as a Quality Assurance/Quality Control
“Hold Point”. Manufacture of materials/products for inclusion in the works shall not commence
until the Architect’s written acceptance of the prototypes has been received.
c) Shop Drawings for the prototypes shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of
the Specification.
d) Any modifications required to the prototypes shall be recorded to show their final construction.
e) Programme tests to enable any necessary adjustments without delay to the works programme.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
A.4009 Quality Benchmarks

a) Upon commencement of installation, erect complete sections of elements of the works, where
described in the particular Works Sections, for acceptance of the Architect. These shall be
used as a quality benchmark for the remainder of the works until Practical Completion.
b) Installations shall not commence in other areas of that particular trade until the Architect has
examined and accepted the quality benchmark. Carry out immediately any alterations or
adjustments required by the Architect in order to achieve the quality of installation required.
c) Upon receipt of the Architect’s acceptance, fully protect the quality benchmark. It shall be used,
from time to time, by the Architect to check and monitor quality of materials and workmanship
incorporated in the remaining areas of the works, or where specifically stated for the purpose of
further testing. Remove and replace all protection when requested by the Architect for such
purposes.
A.4010 Shop Drawings

a) Following Contract award, the required number of Shop Drawings, and where specifically
requested in writing, relevant structural, thermal and acoustic calculations and other data, shall
be submitted to the Architect for review in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
b) The Architect will review the Shop Drawings for compliance with the Specification and the
Design Drawings in visual, performance and overall functional matters only. The Detailed Design
and construction of components shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
c) The Architect’s review of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for errors, or for supplying components and materials to the full satisfaction of the Architect.
d) The Shop Drawings shall be fully dimensioned in metric, to an agreed scale appropriate to the
detail, and include:
i) Full size details and graphic representation describing materials, components and
equipment, construction, finishes, provision for movements, fabrication and erection
tolerances.
ii) Layouts, locations and assemblies of all types of construction detail and junctions, details
of materials, method of jointing, details of all Site connections and fixing and sealing
methods, finishes and all pertinent information related to:
• Method of fabrication and construction.
• Proper relation to adjoining work.
• Finishes.
• Amplification of details.
• Minor changes to the Design to suit actual conditions.
e) Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and do not commence
fabrication of components until formally returned by the Architect with either "A" or “B” stamped
on each of the Shop Drawings. Ensure that space is left clear on each of the Shop Drawings for
stamping by the Architect. The following drawing inspection codes shall be used when
returning the Shop Drawings to the Contractor:
i) Drawing stamped “Category A” - Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed
in accordance with the drawing submitted.
ii) Drawing stamped “Category B” - Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed
in accordance with the drawings submitted subject to the Contractor taking necessary
action based on the Architect’s comments and all annotations added to the returned
drawings. Unless indicated to the contrary on such drawings, the work shall comply with
the Contract Documents. To achieve “Category A” status, the required number of copies
of amended drawings shall be sent to the Architect.
iii) Drawings stamped “Category C” - No work shall be fabricated, manufactured or
constructed. Submit new drawings to the Architect for review until re-submission is not
required.
f) The Architect’s final comment on the Shop Drawings (Category A) shall be conditional upon
receipt of all documentation, certification, acceptances in respect of anchorages, fire stop
assemblies, samples, mock-ups and test reports, etc. as defined in the Specification.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
g) The receipt of Shop Drawings by the Contractor from the Architect marked A or B shall not
constitute agreement of a variation.
h) When preparing the Shop Drawings consult the current Architectural, Structural and Services
Design Drawings, adjusting the Shop Drawings to allow for any changes to Site tolerances
and/or discrepancies where applicable.
i) If, before commencing or during the preparation of the Shop Drawings the design intent of the
Design Drawings and/or Specification may be affected, or where other elements of the works
may be affected, notify the Architect immediately.
j) Where applicable, the Shop Drawings may utilise the manufacturer’s standard details provided
that they comply with the design intent.
k) The Architect shall have the right at all reasonable times to visit the Contractor’s (or his
specialist sub-contractors) design office to check on progress.
l) The Shop Drawings shall be annotated in English and titled in the manner determined for the
Contract, with the title block fully indicating the part of the works to which they apply.
m) Information contained in any of the Design Drawings shall be treated as confidential and shall
not be utilised for any purpose other than for the works. Such information shall not be
communicated to third parties for other purposes without the specific acceptance of the
Architect.
n) Maintain on Site a full set of Design Drawings, Shop Drawings and technical specifications.
o) Upon completion of the design, manufacture and installation phases, provide the Architect with
the appropriate number of As-built Drawings, in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
p) No Shop Drawings shall be accepted if produced to a reduced size.
q) The Shop Drawings shall be fully co-ordinated with interfacing trades.
A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals

a) Upon completion of the works and when deemed necessary by the Architect, provide As-built
Drawings in a computer format, agreed with the Architect, showing the works as finally
fabricated and erected in accordance with the Category “A” status Shop Drawings.
b) The As-built Drawings referred to above shall include any Site variances or installation
adjustments or variations and any actual Site or setting-out dimensional modifications as
installed.
c) As-built Drawings shall be produced to a relevant and agreed scale and shall be used to
complement the Maintenance Manual for the specific purpose of locating the elements within
the overall structure.
A.4012 Other Submittals
a) Product Data: Provide technical information detailing the characteristics of each system, system
component or material incorporated in the works. This shall include material schedules and
manufacturer’s literature.
b) Certifications: Provide independently certified reports verifying compliance of each element or
component with the requirements of the Design Drawings and Specification. These reports
shall include the chemical and physical properties of various building materials.
c) QA/QC Programme: Provide a programme to satisfy the requirements of A.6000 of the
Specification, the Contract conditions or any other documents referred to in the Contract
Documentation.
d) Pre-construction Testing Reports:
i) Provide technical reports recording test results systems, components and materials as
required by the Design Drawings, the Specification, the Architect or a testing laboratory,
prior to commencement of installation.
ii) These reports shall state compliance with the technical requirements of the Specification
and include, where appropriate, test certificates.
e) Maintenance/Operation Manuals: Manuals prepared by the Contractor for the Client/building
user’s maintenance and operation of the various building systems and/or components thereof.
f) Supplementary Product Literature: Such literature may include manufacturer’s catalogue

rooflight system.
8/06/07
information, product specifications, standard illustrations, diagrams and standard details. The
supplementary product literature shall describe physical characteristics such as size, weight,
finish, material analysis, electrical requirements and other information such as load tables, test
results, assessments and industry quality standards.
g) Technical Calculations: These shall consist of technical engineering calculations which
document technical performance of various systems, system components and/or materials, as
required by the Design Drawings and Specifications.
h) Guarantees and warranties: Provide certified copies of all relevant guarantees and warranties
available for installed materials and products.
i) All submittals provided shall be written in the English language.
A.4013 Review of Submittals

a) The Architect shall review submittals for general and practical conformance with the
requirements of the Design. Submittals which meet these requirements shall be stamped or
marked in accordance with the procedure described herein. Submittals which are incomplete or
erroneous, or which are not required, will be returned and a new submittal made as necessary.
The Architect’s review shall not be exhaustive and shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for any omission or deficiencies or from the responsibility to co-ordinate the work
with that of others (which includes the taking of relevant Site dimensions as necessary).
b) Submittals which provide supplementary information to substantiate the technical performance
of building systems, components and materials including, but not necessarily limited to,
supplementary product literature, certifications, statements of manufacturer’s review and pre-
construction testing and inspection reports, will be stamped ‘Record Document’ by the
Contractor before submission.
c) Resubmittals shall be made under the procedure for initial submittals; identifying changes made
since previous submittals.
A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA

This section (A.5000) is applicable only to Descriptive works.
A.5100 General
A.5101 Performance Requirements

a) The works shall comply with the following performance criteria unless there are detailed
performance criteria stated in clause series 1400 of the Particular Work Sections. Refer also to
the Structural and Services Engineers’ Documentation for specific performance requirements
where applicable.
b) The performance criteria included in the Specification sets the minimum standards with which
the Detailed Design solutions shall comply, and the means by which compliance shall be
checked and controlled prior to completion.
c) Although the Design Drawings show considerable detail and dimensions, no warranty or
representation is given by the Architect as to the accuracy of such dimensions or the adequacy
or buildability of such details. Should the Contractor adopt the details or arrangements
indicated on the Design Drawings it shall be deemed that he has checked their buildability and
performance in terms of this Specification, all relevant Regulations and codes of practice, and
manufacturers' recommendations for any products referred to.
d) Minimum Requirements: Where there is in existence a relevant British Standard, BS code of
practice, draft BS, German DIN Standard, ISO Standard, European Standard or British Board
of Agrément Certificate applicable to the design, execution or performance of the works or any
part thereof, then the recommendations and requirements of such documents shall be
considered a minimum standard for the work described and must be complied with. Should two
standards conflict, draw attention to this and state the option chosen, at Tender stage.
A.5200 Design and Service Life

A.5201 Design Life of Building
The design life of the building shall be as BS ISO 15686: Part 1, Table 1, 60 years and with BS
7543 category 2 maintenance level.
A.5202 Service Life of Components

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) The design life of the building shall be the period stated in A.5201 above; however, it is
recognised that various elements/components have varying 'service life' (i.e. actual period of
time during which no excessive expenditure is required on operation, maintenance or repair of a
component or construction – as recorded in use) for primary and secondary components.
b) Primary components are all components with a predicted service life not less than the design
life of the element being specified without the need for maintenance, other than regular
cleaning.
c) Secondary components are all components with a predicted service life of the element being
specified, assuming regular cleaning and maintenance in accordance with information supplied
by the manufacturer. Secondary components shall be capable of easy replacement without
compromising the structural or weatherproof integrity of the element being specified.
Secondary components shall be capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of
adjacent elements.
d) Confirm the predicted service life (i.e. the service life predicted from recorded performance or
accelerated tests) and maintenance requirements of the components of the building as defined
in BS 7543 and BS ISO 15686 for the review by the Architect and provide detailed information
at Tender Stage.
e) Materials shall be used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and which satisfy
the requirements of the Specification.
f) Premature deterioration shall not be acceptable.
A.5300 Structural
Refer to the Structural Specification by others for particular requirements.
A.5301 Movements and Tolerances

a) The Detailed Design, fabrication and installation shall take into account all tolerances and
movements of the building structure. Movements include the application of dead, live and wind
loads plus moisture, shrinkage, creep and thermal effects.
b) The Detailed Design shall take account of all structural movement and tolerances, in permanent
and temporary conditions, to avoid stress, deformation and material failure.
c) Torsional stresses shall be accommodated safely.
d) The works shall withstand all movements of the building structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or any reduction in performance.
e) All fixings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment to suit building movement and
prevent system/installation failure.
f) Movement joints shall accommodate the maximum movement that can be derived from the
specified and determined design loads and movements. Under maximum movements the joints
shall meet all the performance requirements of the Specification.
g) The works shall resist all specified static and dynamic design loads likely to be encountered
without causing permanent deformation of components or the failure of systems, materials or
seals and shall transmit such loads safely to the points of support.
h) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any adjacent trade.
i) The works shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
reduction in the specified performance:
i) Deflection under design loads.
ii) The effects of any wind or pressure loadings.
iii) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements,
including settlement, creep, twisting and racking.
iv) Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
v) Thermal and moisture related movements.
A.5302 Dead Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any reduction
in performance:

rooflight system.
8/06/07
i) The component and final assembly dead load which shall be accommodated locally
without causing deflections or movements which adversely affect any component.
ii) The dead loads derived from any permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces
of the works.
b) When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered.
A.5303 Live Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
i) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and support structure.
ii) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the works,
without deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
iii) Loads imposed during replacement of components.
b) When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered.
A.5304 Deflections
a) The works when carrying full design loads shall not exceed the deflection limits specified within
the relevant Particular Work Section.
b) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any component or
adjacent structural or building elements.
c) All components, couplings and fixings shall be capable of accommodating deflections without
permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
d) The works shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed
by adjacent structures.
e) The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part
of the works, its support structure or internal finishes.
A.5305 Wind Loads

a) The works shall withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of wind loads where
appropriate (e.g. external conditions or internal areas subject to external wind pressure).
b) Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Wind tunnel test Report.
c) When assessing the wind pressure allowances, account shall be taken of the shape of the
building and its location in relation to the layout of the adjacent structures.
d) Particular attention is to be paid to areas subject to increased pressures as defined by BS
6399: Part 2, i.e. eaves, canopies and external corners. Special care shall also be taken to
identify and design for any situation not clearly defined in BS 6399: Part 2 where it is believed
that the geometry of the building shall cause increased pressure due to vortex or eddy
conditions. Maximum gust wind pressure shall be calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part
2. Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test Report.
e) When calculating loads it shall be ensured that the worst combination of load cases have been
considered and in particular, that the governing wind pressure coefficients may be determined
by more than one wind regime. Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test Report.
A.5306 Preceding Work

a) At the appropriate time check all preceding work, including checking line, level and fixing points
and report immediately to the Architect if any is considered to be unsuitable and propose
remedial action if so requested by the Architect.
b) Prior to manufacture of components, where possible, inspect the Site and check measurements
of the preceding works while completing the Shop Drawings and co-ordinate all Site
dimensions.
c) The Shop Drawings shall include full details of all interface conditions, demonstrating full
compatibility with adjoining items of work and that the Detailed Design takes into account all
such conditions.
A.5307 Vibration

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Ensure that the works withstand all vibration caused by traffic, aircraft, equipment effects or any other
shocks, slamming, strains, stresses and movement imposed, thus avoiding deterioration or fracture of
any element, both during construction and after installation.
A.5400 Environmental Conditions
A.5401 Generally
a) Ensure that the works conform to all aspects of the Specification, taking into account all local
environmental conditions prevailing at Site.
b) Refer to the Particular Requirement Sections for specific performance data.
c) Obtain any additional meteorological and climate data considered necessary in order to fulfil
contractual obligations.
d) Allow for the fact that the works will be erected in all extremes of weather conditions throughout
the year and that the building may not be climatically controlled during construction. Damage to
materials as a result of Site conditions shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
e) All material grades, manufacturing methods and standards, corrosion protection, etc. shall be
selected so that they are fully suited to the internal and external environmental conditions as set
out below (to meet the relevant British Standards and all other relevant standards) and as
contained in the relevant parts of the Mechanical & Electrical Engineer’s Specifications and
Drawings. Refer to Mechanical & Electrical Engineer’s Specifications and Drawings for relevant
data.
A.5402 Psychrometric Data

a) External Climate: Summer: Refer to the M&E Specification.
b) External Climate: Winter: Refer to the M&E Specification.
c) Internal Conditions: Refer to the M&E Specification.
d) Internal Conditions during Construction: As items a) and b) above.
A.5500 Fire and Smoke Stops
A.5501 General Requirements

a) Detail and co-ordinate all necessary fire/ smoke stops required by NFPA 5000, Local Building
Regulations, Civil Defence and the Relevant Local Authority.
b) Where the Local Statutory Authorities and/or Local/National Fire Regulations require a specific
fire resistance to elements of structure which form a junction with adjacent components, ensure
that the junction is fire stopped to the same degree as the elements.
A.5502 Fire Protection
a) Fire performance in terms of fire resistance of elements and structure shall be determined in
accordance with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) Supply test certificates to demonstrate that all materials meet the above requirements.
c) Ensure compliance with all Statutory Authorities' and Fire Services' requests/recommendations
and ensure discharge of relevant conditions in their respect.
A.5600 Corrosion Protection
A.5601 General
a) Ensure that protective measures are taken to avoid any corrosion or any deleterious effects
caused by manufacturing, finishing, transportation, storage and installation of materials.
b) Ensure full resistance to any corrosion for components that are secured or bolted to each other,
paying particular attention to the surface damage caused by such bolting or securing.
c) Ensure full resistance in repair of corrosion protection to cope with the Site cutting of
components, especially at boundary and external conditions.
d) The minimum requirements for the corrosion protection system for secondary structural
steelwork shall conform to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS EN ISO 14713 as
appropriate. For primary structural steelwork refer to the Structural Engineer’s Specification.
The environmental category under BS EN ISO 12944: Part 2 shall be:

rooflight system.
8/06/07
i) External corrosion category:

• Category C5-M including resistance to the effects of high salinity, wind blown sand
including sand storms: Refer also to clause A.5402.
ii) Interior corrosion category:
• Category C1: Refer also to clause A.5402.
e) Allow for protection against all corrosion arising from exposure to seawater, non-saline water,
soil, high humidity, low or high temperatures, chemical acids and alkalis, abrasion and impact,
fungi and bacteria.
f) Particular care shall be taken with delivery and storage on Site, particularly if storage is
prolonged. On no account shall materials or components be stored or used beyond the
manufacturer’s expiry date.
A.5602 Galvanising Corrosion Protection

The interval to first maintenance shall be no less than the following period as defined in BS EN ISO
14713:
a) Very long (equal to or greater than 20 years).
A.5603 Electrolytic Protection

At all locations where different metals are assembled together, ensure that electrolytic corrosion does
not occur and that the necessary protection is provided where needed, in both temporary and
permanent conditions.
A.5700 Earth Bonding
A.5701 General
a) All extraneous conductive parts of the works shall be effectively bonded to earth. An extraneous
conductive part is defined as being that part which is liable to transmit a potential, including
earth potential, and not forming part of the electrical installation. Each component shall
constitute an extraneous conductive part.
b) The works shall be electrically continuous as required by the latest edition of the IEE (Institution
of Electrical Engineers) Regulations.
c) Equipotential bonding shall be provided to ensure that the various exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conductive parts as defined by the IEE Regulations shall be at a substantially
equal potential.
d) Earthing connecting shall comply with BS 6651 and BS 7430. Copies of the final testing
certificates shall be incorporated in the Health and Safety File.
A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL

A.6100 General Quality Assurance, Quality Control, Testing
A.6101 General
a) Establish, document and maintain a quality assurance and quality control system capable of
verifying to the satisfaction of the Architect that all materials and workmanship, whatever their
sources, conform to the requirements of the Specification. Should the Contractor or any of his
sub-contractors be certified to the BS EN ISO 9000 family of standards then these works shall
be monitored accordingly.
b) The quality programme shall be defined in a quality control manual or similar document in which
the organisation systems, inspection and test plan procedures are fully described to ensure that
all essential inspection requirements are determined and satisfied throughout all phases of the
works.
c) Establish a tolerance quality control manual to cover all aspects of tolerance compliance
relating to the works. A quality control proposal shall be prepared for submission to the
Architect for acceptance. This shall describe, in detail, the various types of quality control
checks that shall be carried out during each stage of the works; what means and methods shall
be used; which personnel shall be employed, together with their qualifications, and how each
type of tolerance check shall be recorded and kept for future reference.
d) The Contractor’s proposals for the quality control manual shall meet the requirements of this

rooflight system.
8/06/07
section as a minimum and be submitted to the Architect. Provide facilities in the event that the
Architect wishes to examine these proposals at the works. Include details of any formal
approvals held for the Contractor’s or any sub-contractor’s quality system or any evaluations or
assessments carried out by independent third parties.
e) Within 30 days of the written order to commence the works, submit a comprehensive quality
control manual to the Architect for review, amendment where appropriate and acceptance.
f) Include with the quality control manual an inspection and test plan for each major item of work
or type of fabrication which shall detail, in sequential order:
i) The principal activities to be carried out.
ii) The type, method and frequency of inspections and tests to be carried out.
iii) The inspecting authority.
iv) The acceptance criteria.
v) The records to be kept.
g) The inspection and test plan shall contain sufficient space for the Architect to indicate on it the
activities he wishes to inspect as either "hold" or "witness" points.
h) A "hold" point is defined as a point on the inspection and test plan beyond which the process
may not continue until it has been accepted by the Architect.
i) A "witness" point is defined as a point on the inspection and test plan where the Contractor
shall give reasonable notice that a particular part of the process has been reached although the
process may continue without acceptance being notified by the Architect.
j) The inspection and test plan shall provide the basis of inspection for the item of work and shall
be accepted prior to commencement of the work.
k) At all times during the Contract period, make available at the works all necessary resources and
facilities and implement any reviews and amendments of the quality control manual deemed
necessary or desirable by the Architect.
l) As a minimum the quality control manual shall include information and procedures as defined
below:
i) Organisation and Management.
ii) Facilities, Measuring and Test Equipment.
iii) Personnel Training and Certification.
iv) Documentation.
v) Receipts, Storage, Handling and Transportation.
vi) Materials.
vii) Welding.
viii) Fabrication and Erection.
ix) Tolerance Control.
x) Prototypes.
xi) Painting and Coating.
xii) Inspection and Testing of Materials and Workmanship.
xiii) Non-conforming Items.
xiv) Detailed Design.
xv) Control of Purchased Materials and Services.
xvi) Completed Item, Inspection and Test Results.
xvii) Records.
xviii) Review of the Quality System.
A.6102 Testing and Inspection

a) Where required, engage an accredited independent testing specialist, as agreed with the

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Architect, to verify that the requirements of the Contract have been satisfied.
b) Allow for testing on samples and materials incorporated in the works as necessary.
c) Include and supply detailed proposals of tests that demonstrate compliance with the
requirements of the Specification and the Design Drawings.
d) The following minimum provisions shall be made available to the Architect at all times:
i) Suitably qualified personnel using appropriate validated equipment.
ii) All necessary access and facilities for inspection and testing in fabrication shops and on
Site.
iii) Regularly calibrated equipment for the purposes of load measuring.
e) Maintain the following:
i) Tests and inspection results during all stages of manufacture, assembly and installation of
components.
ii) Certificates relating to the materials used in the work, as confirmation of tests carried out
in accordance with the relevant standards and codes.
iii) Records of all inspections and tests performed to substantiate conformity with the
Specification, including those carried out by sub-contractors and sub-suppliers.
f) Should any test reveal defective material and/or workmanship, immediately carry out any
remedial work and/or re-testing, including that of a special nature, under instruction from the
Architect.
g) Indicate on the Contract Programme the exact timing of all testing, procedural trials and trial
assemblies, in order to allow the Architect the opportunity of attending.
h) If the Architect is of the opinion that the works do not conform to the requirements of this
document, or to the details indicated on the Shop Drawings, then the Architect shall give
instructions for special tests to be carried out to establish the case.
A.6200 Statutory Regulations
A.6201 Standards
a) British Standards and Local Building Regulations and Codes shall be the governing standards
for the works.
b) Only where expressly stated in the Specification shall other National Standards be applicable to
the works.
c) All reference to British and other standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies
shall mean the latest published editions at the time of Contract award. Where such standards,
regulations and requirements are amended after Contract award and affect the Contractor’s
responsibilities during the course of the works, immediately inform the Architect in writing.
d) If unable to comply with the governing standards or regulations and proposing to substitute
other National Standards, inform the Architect within the summary of deviations from the
Specification. Provide fully detailed reasons for being unable to comply, together with any
design and/or technical implications. Failure to provide such notification prior to Contract award
shall be deemed to be acceptance of the governing standards or regulations and later
notification shall be a nullity.
A.6202 Building Codes and Regulations

a) All materials, components, equipment and workmanship shall comply with all Local Authority
Codes and Local Building Regulations, British Standards, and any other regulations applicable
to the works, together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, Bye-Laws and other
enforceable instruments in both the design and execution of the installation.
b) Unless stated otherwise, British Codes and Standards shall apply to the Building Design and
Materials as listed herein.
A.6203 Submissions to Authorities

a) When required by the Local Statutory Authorities, submit to them any component part of the
works for appraisal, testing, stamping or certifying.
b) After such component part has been satisfactorily approved, tested, stamped or certified, return

rooflight system.
8/06/07
the marked component or documentary evidence of its approval, as appropriate, to Site for
reference purposes.
c) If the Local Statutory Authority rejects components, replace the component part(s) with those
that are acceptable.
d) Obtain any approvals required from the Statutory Authorities.
A.6204 Design Regulations

Ensure that the Shop Drawings comply with all Statutory Regulations, requirements and relevant
codes and that they receive the necessary approval in good time to ensure that there is no
programme delay caused by awaiting such approvals.
A.6300 Safety and Protection
A.6301 Health and Safety Requirements

a) Comply with the latest National Health and Safety requirements/regulations, ensuring that full
consideration is given to the health and safety of operatives when completing the Detailed
Design, manufacturing, installing or operating and maintaining the works.
b) The Shop Drawings shall only incorporate methods of manufacture, installation, maintenance
and use that are safe and comply with all Health and Safety requirements.
A.6302 Damage Anticipation

Other than damage through terrorist attack or similar activity, anticipate the possible sources of
damage to the works and take active and positive protective measures to maintain them in pristine
condition until full Practical Completion. The acceptance of responsibility for making good in the
event of damage shall not be considered adequate.
A.6303 Protective Devices

Provide necessary protective devices to protect all goods and materials incorporated into the works,
at all stages through to Practical Completion, against damage arising from but not limited to weather
conditions, construction, other contractors, warping, distortion, abrasion and other conditions which
could have an adverse effect on any goods and/or materials used in the works.
A.6304 Protective Measures

Provide full details of the protective measures proposed for implementation at each of the following
stages:
a) Manufacture and packaging of goods and materials at off-Site locations.
b) Shipment to Site and unloading.
c) Storage on Site and movement to point of installation or construction.
d) Installation/construction.
e) Completion to handover.
A.6305 Packing and Crating

a) Where components are delivered to the Site in packages or crates, then each package or crate
shall be labelled on the outside giving the reference and quantity of the contents so that
deliveries can be accepted at the Site without the necessity of breaking open any package.
b) Carefully remove all protection from the works immediately before Practical Completion and
leave the works perfectly clean and fit for immediate use.
A.6306 Protection of Glazed Elements

a) All elements of framework and associated beads and strips shall be stored on Site such that
they shall not be damaged, distorted or weathered unevenly.
b) All finished components shall be carefully packed in stillages or crates such that they are
suitably separated and protected to prevent scratching, scuffing or other surface damage.
c) All glass panes, sealants and gaskets shall be stored on Site in accordance with their
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
A.6307 Vermin and Insects

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) The Detailed Design, manufacture and installation of the works shall protect against and not
contain or provide harbourage for infestation by vermin or insects.
b) Carry out the recommendations and take account of Digest 415 produced by the Building
Research Establishment.
A.6400 Maintenance, Training and Replacement Materials
A.6401 General
a) Replaceable materials/components shall be maximised.
b) Materials shall be capable of simple maintenance/repair and integration with other maintenance
systems.
A.6402 Maintenance Manual

a) One month before programmed completion of the works/Practical Completion prepare and
submit, to the satisfaction of the Architect, three copies of a Maintenance Manual required to
maintain the works.
b) Content:
i) The Maintenance Manual shall incorporate all maintenance systems and give details of the
operation and required maintenance of all items, components and systems comprising the
works.
ii) This information shall be supplied for the Architect’s review in the following format:
• Specially written information shall be on A4 size pages with typed text using double
spacing and in a format agreed prior to submission.
• Drawn information shall generally be on A1 size sheets.
• Standard published information shall be carefully selected and edited to include
only those items installed. Where editing is not appropriate, the relevant items shall
be typed out and included.
c) Component Information: The following information shall be supplied for every item, component
and/or system:
i) Certified manufacturing certificate.
ii) Full description giving any special features. A full breakdown of the parts and the
catalogue number of the constituent parts.
iii) The guarantee period of any element or material where in excess of the warranty required
by the Specification.
d) Maintenance Procedures: The Maintenance Manual shall include fully comprehensive details in
respect of:
i) Cleaning procedures for all elements of the works.
ii) Replacement procedures.
iii) Regular cyclical maintenance procedures (avoiding damage).
iv) Repair procedures in the event of damage.
v) Washing methods, including the frequency and method of washing required to maintain
performance and appearance. Details shall be provided in respect of the maximum time
during which performance of components can be maintained, together with the frequency
and method of washing required to achieve this.
A.6403 Training of User’s Personnel

a) Prior to Practical Completion of the works provide skilled staff/operatives to instruct the user’s
staff on the correct and efficient operation and maintenance of all systems, components, plant,
equipment and controls as detailed in the Maintenance Manual.
b) Provide a programme and schedule of training requirements, prior to completion of the works,
stating the minimum amount of time which is required for the skilled staff to train the user’s staff.
c) Throughout the training period remain responsible for the operation and maintenance of the
works.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
d) Where such training cannot be carried out prior to Practical Completion of the works due to the
nature of the equipment, return to Site at a later mutually agreed date to complete the training
period.
A.6404 Replacement Materials

a) Where required by the Contract, provide replacement materials upon completion of the works.
b) All replacement materials shall be of identical quality to those installed in the works.
c) In addition, supply a list of recommended replacement materials, together with unit prices for
specialist elements of the works. (Note: This shall not form part of the Tender price but shall
form the basis for costing of materials as required by the user).
d) All replacement materials provided as part of the works shall be handed over in crates, boxes or
cabinets, each individually marked with the words "Replacement Parts for . . " and the
component or equipment name and reference number stencilled on. Such materials shall be
identified within the Contract Documents.
A.6405 Relationship with Health and Safety File

a) Provide information as required for inclusion in the Health and Safety File.
b) In addition, agree with the Architect suitable cross-referencing in the Manual so that it is fully
co-ordinated with the Health and Safety File and other Contractor’s O&M Manuals.
A.6500 General Materials and Workmanship Requirements

A.6510 Materials
A.6511 Standard of Materials and Quality

a) Materials shall be new, unless otherwise specified, carefully selected and of the best
merchantable quality.
b) All materials shall be acceptable to the Architect.
c) Preference shall be given to materials/products that comply with the Construction Products
Directive (CPD) and are physically labelled with CE marking.
d) Insulation materials generally shall comply with all the recommendations of the LPC Design
Guide for the Fire Protection of Buildings.
e) Expanded polystyrene or polyurethane core sandwich panels shall not be used in the works
unless the Contractor complies with all the recommendations of the LPC Design Guide for the
Fire Protection of Buildings 2000 from the date of its first publication in December 1999 or any
subsequent guidance which supersedes this guidance.
A.6512 Health Hazards
All proposed materials shall not in any way be a potential health hazard. Maintain a full, up-to-date
knowledge of all current published research and legislation in this respect. The Contractor shall also
accept the exclusions contained in the Contract documents.
A.6513 Deleterious Materials

The following materials shall not be used in the works unless it can be demonstrated, to the
satisfaction of the Architect, that they are safe during manufacture, installation and use and that their
suitability is ensured:
a) Asbestos or asbestos-containing products, as defined in the United Kingdom’s Control of
Asbestos at Work Regulations 2002, or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof, and
the Asbestos (Prohibitions) Regulations 1992 and as amended 1999 and 1999(2) or any later
statutory modification or re-enactment thereof.
b) Lead where the metal or its corrosive products may be directly ingested, inhaled or absorbed.
Applications of lead such as roofing, flashings, rainwater goods and copper alloy fittings
containing lead which are specifically required are acceptable, until equal or better alternatives
are available.
c) Lead based paints and primers.
d) Urea formaldehyde foam or materials which may release formaldehyde beyond British Standard
limits.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
e) Pitch polymer DPC.

f) Materials which generally comprise mineral fibres, either man-made or naturally occurring, which
have a diameter of 3 microns or less and a length of 200 microns or less, or which contain any
fibres not sealed, encapsulated, or otherwise stabilised to ensure that fibre migration is
prevented. Products that may contain these fibres include insulation, fire protection and air
filters. For all mineral wool insulation products, test evidence must be available and produced
confirming that the materials fulfil the requirements of European Directive 97/69/EC and the
Approved Supply List of current HSE CHIP Regulations and consequently are not classified as
a possible human carcinogen.
g) Chlorofluorocarbons or hydrochlorofluorocarbons or any goods and/or materials containing the
same (e.g. materials in which CFC's, HCFCs or HFAs have been used as blowing agents)
h) The use of a species of hardwood from the tropical rainforests is not permitted unless it is
obtained from sustainable resources.
i) High alumina cement in structural elements.
j) Wood wool slabs in permanent formwork to concrete or in structural elements.
k) Calcium chloride in admixtures for use in reinforced concrete.
l) Aggregates for use in reinforced concrete which do not comply with BS EN 12620 and
aggregates for use in concrete which do not comply with the provisions of BS 8110.
m) Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), polychlorinated terphenyls (PCTs) or any goods and/or
materials containing the same.
n) Calcium silicate bricks or tiles.
o) Sea dredged aggregates that do not comply with the chloride limits specified in BS EN 206,
BS EN 12620, BS EN 1744: Part 1 and BS 8500.
p) Lindane - wood treatment/insecticidal spray.
q) Pentachlorophenol (PCP) or timber treated with Pentachlorophenol - biocide/wood
preservative.
r) Tributyltin (TBT).
s) If wishing to use any of the materials that are listed above, prepare detailed observations for the
Client based upon the guidelines contained within the document “Good Practice in the
Selection of Construction Materials” prepared by Ove Arup & Partners.
t) Paints and coatings shall comply with the following:
i) Paints and coatings shall have a low VOC content, the limits of which are established in
the following:
• -Green Seal standard GS-11 paints first edition May 20 1993.
• -Green Seal standard GC-03 anti-corrosive paints, second edition Jan 07 1997.
• -(SCAQMD) rule #1113, Architectural Coatings.
A.6514 Sustainable Sources of Timber

a) All softwood timbers and all temperate hardwoods shall be procured from sustainable sources.
b) Tropical hardwoods in timber or timber based products (including but not limited to veneers,
lippings and manufactured board) shall be avoided.
c) Tropical hardwoods or timber-based products from unsustainable or unknown origin are
prohibited from use in the works.
d) All timber and timber based products shall carry the Forest Stewardship Council’s (FSC)
Trademark or other label from an equivalent internationally recognised, globally applicable,
independent certification system for good forest management, acceptable to the Architect.
Demonstrate that the proposed FSC accredited timber is available in the required quantities.
e) Full shipping documents to confirm chain of custody from the concession/plantation to the UK
supplier’s premises shall be supplied.
f) Endeavour to source timber and timber based products in accordance with sub-clause d). If
unable to comply, offer for acceptance timber and timber based products which are from a
known source being a well-managed forest and provide as a minimum the following
rooflight system.
8/06/07
documentation:
i) The species and country of origin.
ii) The identity of the concession/plantation.
iii) Details of the forestry policies pursued by the concession/plantation confirming that a
sustainable resource policy is followed.
iv) Full shipping documents to confirm chain of custody from the concession/plantation to
the UK supplier’s premises.
g) All plywood used in the works shall be from softwood or temperate hardwoods from sustainable
sources.
h) Provide information to the Architect in respect of timber products proposed for use in the works
for review and acceptance by the Architect. No timber products shall be procured prior to
acceptance of the proposed timber products by the Architect. The information shall be
presented to the Architect in tabular form under the following headings:
i) Country of Origin.
ii) Trade Name.
iii) Botanical Name.
iv) Wood Product Volume Category A (m³).
v) Wood Product Volume Category B (m³).
vi) Wood Product Volume Category R (m³).
vii) Total Volume (m³), where timber is:
• Category A: From an FSC certified forest.
• Category B: From a known certifiable forest.
• Category R: Recycled material.
A.6550 Workmanship
A.6551 Skilled Personnel

Execute the work using persons skilled in the processes to be adopted. Where requested, provide
such documentation necessary to demonstrate an individual’s ability to carry out the work to which he
has been assigned.
A.6552 Suitability of Structure

Before commencing any part or element of the works, survey the structure, checking line, level and
fixing points and report immediately to the Architect if the structure is considered to be unsuitable. If
the structure is unsuitable, propose remedial action.
A.6553 Setting Out

a) Establish a physical Base Reference Datum on Site from which all primary plan positioned grids
and principal levels are subsequently set out. This Base Reference Datum point shall be
strategically placed such that it can be referred to as necessary for the duration of the works. It
shall be physically robust and located in ground that is not prone to movement or vibration
during the works so that it is spatially fixed for the duration of the works. The Base Reference
Datum shall be located to within ±2mm accuracy of the design dimension to the designated
reference point.
b) Suitably qualified personnel shall carry out all primary setting out. It shall be done using
instruments and methods appropriate for achieving the necessary precision and accuracy.
c) Prior to commencing the installation, submit to the Architect the proposed method of setting
out, how grid lines shall be marked on Site and how their positions shall be checked and
maintained for the duration of the works.
d) The plan position of any designated mark (measured to its centre) defining a Primary Positional
Grid Line shall be located to within ±2mm of its design dimension from the Base Reference
Datum.
A.6554 Project Tolerances Definitions

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) Tolerance: The defined maximum allowable dimensional deviation from a prescribed or agreed
value or position.
b) Base Reference Datum: The physical marker established on Site to define the base reference
plan and level position to which all other Site setting out is referenced.
c) Dimension: Any prescribed dimension, or any dimension which can be determined from a set of
prescribed dimensions, for any element or part thereof as defined by the designer responsible
for that element.
d) Primary Positional Grid Line: Any setting-out grid line used to define the spatial layout of the
project and to which the local setting out of elements may be referenced.
e) Location Reference Point: A specified point that is used to define the position of certain other
points and/or elements.
f) Location Reference Plane: A specified plane that is used to define the position of certain other
planes and/or elements. The reference plane shall typically be defined by a specified set of
reference points.
g) Location Reference Surface: A specified surface that is used to define the position of another
surface and/or surfaces. The reference surface may be defined mathematically (e.g. as part of a
cylinder or as part of a sphere) where it is spatially fixed in relation to specified reference points.
h) Reference Element: A specified element that is used to define the position of other elements.
Typically a specific point on the reference element shall be defined to any other element to
which it refers.
A.6555 Compatibility
Ensure that all materials and processes employed in the works are compatible with each other and
meet the current requirements of the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice.
A.6556 Manufacturer’s Instructions

a) Where proprietary systems are specified and included in the works, ensure that the method of
building or installing is strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and
that copies of all such documentation are supplied to the Architect prior to commencement of
the works.
b) All materials and associated components shall be stored in a clean dry area, in accordance with
the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
A.6557 Suppliers
Be responsible for all materials, components and equipment supplied or manufactured by sub-
contractors or suppliers, until the end of the warranty period defined in the Contract.
A.6558 Covering Up
No work shall be covered up without agreement by the Architect. Afford reasonable notice and full
opportunity for the examination and measurement of any work that is about to be covered up.
A.6559 Cutting, etc.

a) All methods, principles, details, etc. for Site cutting of components shall be submitted as part of
the Contractor’s method statement to the Architect for review. No manufacture shall commence
until it can be demonstrated that all proposed techniques have been reviewed by the Architect.
b) Cutting of metal products shall be straight and free from burrs and all joints shall be flush,
without gaps or imperfections. If base metal is exposed, the surface shall be protected to the
same level of protection as stated in the Specification.
A.6560 Deterioration
a) All materials shall be treated/selected to prevent any damage from all possible combinations of
atmospheric deterioration, corrosion, wet rot, dry rot, fungi, mould and all other deleterious
effects including atmospheric pollution and pH factor of the adjacent elements.
b) Ensure that no chemical or electrolytic action takes place where dissimilar metals and/or
materials are used together.
c) No materials shall discolour, crack or otherwise be damaged by the worst possible combination
of environmental conditions identified herein.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
d) With materials subject to surface treatment, special attention shall be given to the substrate to
ensure that the preparation is compatible with the surface treatment.
e) Ensure that all superficial dust and friable materials are removed and that adequate protection is
provided during the process of the surface treatment and finishes to prevent contamination by
dust and other debris.
f) Materials used in the manufacture of the works shall not be liable to infestation attack by micro-
organisms, fungi, insects or other vermin, nor provide harbourage for same.
A.6561 Line and Level

All components shall be installed such that they are plumb or horizontal and shall line up with
adjacent components, in all directions, taking account of the allowable tolerances as defined in the
Project Common Tolerance and Movements Document.
A.6562 Method Statements

A detailed method statement describing the sequence and methods to be employed in carrying out
the works identifying proposed solutions and processes with regard to workmanship, fabrication,
fixing, securing, storing and handling, setting out, site assembly and protection.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
E50 PRECAST CONCRETE MULLIONS/FRAMING ..............................................3
E50.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
E50.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

E50.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 3

E50.1202 Precast Concrete Cappings and Channel Profile. .................................................................................................................3
E50.1203 Precast Concrete Vaulted Rooflight openings for RFL-03A and RFL-03C....................................................................4
E50.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

Tender Submittals .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
E50.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks ................................................................................................. 4
E50.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
E50.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1306 General Requirements for Quality Benchmarks.....................................................................................................................5
E50.1307 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
E50.1308 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

Structural Requirements............................................................................................................................................................... 5
E50.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.2000 PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION....................................................................... 5
E50.2100 DESCRIPTION OF CONCRETE FINISHES .................................................................. 6

E50.2101 Definitions for Surface Finish of Concrete...............................................................................................................................6
E50.2102 Precast Concrete Finish ...............................................................................................................................................................6
E50.2104 Sizes Generally ...............................................................................................................................................................................7
E50.2105 Moulds Generally............................................................................................................................................................................7
E50.2106 Materials and Construction for Moulds ....................................................................................................................................8
E50.2107 Built-in Components .....................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2108 Colour Consistency .......................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2109 Aggregates.......................................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2110 Materials Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2111 Dowels/Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2200 QUALITY AND CONTROL ............................................................................................... 9

E50.2201 Quality Control/Monitoring Requirements ...............................................................................................................................9
E50.2202 Batching, Mixing and Transport..................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2203 Generally...........................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2205 Inserts, Holes and Chases...........................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2206 Production Control Unit(s)...........................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2207 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2208 Records.............................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2209 Mix Proportions and Aggregate............................................................................................................................................... 10
E50.2210 Damaged Units ............................................................................................................................................................................ 10
E50.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................10
E50.3100 SITE CONTROL...............................................................................................................11

E50.3101 Storage .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
E50.3102 Setting Out.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
E50.3103 Installation and Propping........................................................................................................................................................... 11
E50.3104 Final Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
E50.3105 Damaged Units ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and E50/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
E50.3106 Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
E50.3107 Accuracy of Erection .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
E50.3200 PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................11

E50.3201 Protection of the Works............................................................................................................................................................. 11

rooflight system.
8/06/07
E50 PRECAST CONCRETE MULLIONS/FRAMING

To be read in conjunction with the Structural Engineer's specification, Section A and other related
sections of the Specification, Preliminaries and Contract Conditions.
E50.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
E50.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

E50.1101 Descriptive Works
a) This section specifies requirements for Precast Concrete mullions/framing associated with
cladding specified in Section H11.
b) For design and general performance requirements, refer to Section A of the Specification.
Specific design and performance requirements are as defined in the particular trade
sections.
c) Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the works whilst
complying with the visual intent indicated on the Design Drawings and criteria stated in the
Specification.
d) Where no material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable
materials and systems prior to Contract award which comply with the visual intent and
performance criteria stated and remain fully responsible for the Detailed Design of the works.
e) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such
material, product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the Architect’s
design intent only. The Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such
other confirmed as acceptable by the Architect in writing, but shall remain fully responsible
for the Detailed Design and performance of the works.
f) Comply with the requirements for samples, mock-ups, benchmarks, etc., as specified for the
proposed finishes and co-ordinate the work accordingly.
g) The CA shall be allowed access to the Contractor's place of manufacture, finishing and off-site
storage of the moulds and precast units when requested by the CA.
E50.1102 Scope of Works

This section of the Specification, when read in conjunction with the Design Drawings, provides
particular requirements with respect to the following:
a) Precast concrete mullions.
b) Associated reinforcement and fixings.
E50.1103 Particular Interfaces

a) Complete the Detailed Design of all interfaces with adjoining trades prior to commencement of
manufacture.
b) All interfaces shall be fully co-ordinated prior to commencement.
E50.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

E50.1202 Precast Concrete Cappings and Channel Profile.
a) Profiled precast concrete capping pieces to mullions of EWS-01, EWS02 and EWS-03 with
stainless steel reinforcement in accordance with the structural engineers specification.
Stainless Steel to be grade 1440.1 (316).
b) Standard: Complete the design in accordance with BS 8110 and the requirements of Section
H11.
c) Comply with the design intent as shown on the Design Drawings and provide all required
reinforcement, bracketry and fixings.
d) Finish: Pre cast with acid etched finish exposing aggregate, even-coloured, blemish-free
smooth as-struck finish to provide Special Class 1, Type B surface finish, uniform in
appearance. Colour reference to be confirmed by the CA.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
e) Joints between caps are to be minimal and open.
E50.1203 Precast Concrete Vaulted Rooflight openings for RFL-03A and RFL-03C.
Refer to the Structural Engineer’s Specification for the structural requirements:
a) Precast concrete domes reinforced with stainless steel as shown on the Design Drawiings with
Special Class 1, Type B surface ribbed finish to inside of dome as indicated on Design
Drawings.
b) External mineral wool insulation and render system applied to the outside face of the precast
concrete vaulted roof to include all interfaces and junctions with other materials. Refer to
section M21 and Design Drawings.
c) Standard: Complete the design in accordance with BS 8110 and the requirements of Section
H11.
d) Comply with the design intent as shown on the Design Drawings and provide all required
reinforcement, bracketry and fixings.
E50.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
E50.1301 Tender Response

a) Provide tender submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section A.4000 of the
Specification.
b) Submit a design response with the Tender proposal, to include all profiles of typical conditions,
with dimensions.
c) The Tender design response shall include:
i) Draft programme indicating Working Drawing programme, sample unit construction,
approval periods.
ii) Colour samples.
iii) Choice of moulds/formwork.
iv) Proposed mixes and treatments within method statements to achieve precast finish
specified.
v) Transportation and storage of units method statements.
vi) Outline of construction sequence, i.e. installation and adjustment of unit installation,
alignment and propping.
vii) Samples where specified.
viii) List of Tests included.
ix) QA/QC programme.
x) List of proposed Working Drawings.
xi) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
xii) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc. including
formwork materials proposed for use.
xiii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks
E50.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Pre-contract 4 samples of each type shall be provided as follows:
a) 600mm length sample of precast concrete mullion in the required colour using proposed
formwork and mix.
b) Sample ranges (provide 6 -12 mixes) 300mmx300mm blocks of colour and texture variations

rooflight system.
8/06/07
for acceptance by the CA.

c) 600mm length sample of precast concrete mullion capping profile in the required colour using
proposed formwork and mix.
d) 600mm length sample of precast concrete floor channel profile in the required colour using
proposed formwork and mix.
e) A quarter section of vaulted/domed rooflight opening showing ribbed finish to internal face of
dome using proposed formwork/moulds.
E50.1303 Post Contract Samples

Post contract samples shall be provided as follows:
a) Samples of finished precast concrete mullion, capping profile and floor channel profile as
agreed, 600mm length. Provide range of samples of the agreed colour demonstrating the upper
and lower limits to be achieved which shall be used as reference samples throughout the
works.
b) Various samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
c) A quarter section of vaulted/domed rooflight opening showing ribbed finish to internal face of
dome using proposed formwork/moulds.
E50.1304 Mock-ups
Refer to Section H11 for Mock-up requirements.
E50.1305 Prototypes
The following prototypes shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
Make allowance for the construction of a prototype as required. Refer to Section H11 for prototype
requirements.
E50.1306 General Requirements for Quality Benchmarks

a) Construct sections of the works as specified, to the satisfaction of the CA. These shall be used
as a quality benchmark for the remainder of the Works until Practical Completion.
b) Do not commence construction in other areas of that particular trade until the CA has examined
and accepted the quality benchmark. Immediately carry out any alterations or adjustments
required by the CA in order to achieve the quality of construction required.
c) Upon receipt of the CA’s acceptance, immediately fully protect the quality benchmark. It shall
be used, from time to time, by the CA to check and monitor the quality of materials and
workmanship incorporated in the remaining areas of the works, or where specifically stated for
the purpose of further testing. Remove and replace all protection when requested by the CA for
such purposes.
E50.1307 Benchmark Requirements

Quality benchmarks shall be provided as follows:
Visible precast units installed on Site representing the finished work.
Testing
E50.1308 Test Requirements

Refer to Section H11 for testing requirements.
E50.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Comply with the general performance of Section A.5000 and the following specific performance
requirements.
Structural Requirements
E50.1401 General
For structural performance requirements, refer to Section H11 and Structural Engineers Report.
E50.2000 PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION

rooflight system.
8/06/07
E50.2100 DESCRIPTION OF CONCRETE FINISHES

E50.2101 Definitions for Surface Finish of Concrete
a) The quality of concrete finish shall be identified by the following classifications in accordance
with BS 8110: Part 1:
i) Class 2 - applicable to surfaces that are to be exposed to view but where appearance is
not critical.
ii) Class 1 - applicable to most surfaces exposed to view, with additional finish requirements
as further described herein.
iii) Special Class - applicable to high standards of appearance as required by the CA.
b) The Type of finish shall be identified by the following codes, in accordance with BS 8110: Part
1:
i) Type A finish: This finish shall be achieved by the use of properly designed formwork or
moulds of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Small blemishes caused by
entrapped air or water may be expected, but the surface shall be free of voids,
honeycombing or other blemishes.
ii) Type B finish: This finish shall be achieved by the use of high quality concrete and
formwork. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and all surfaces shall be true, with
clean arrises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall occur and no staining or
discolouration from the release agent shall be permitted.
iii) Type C finish: This finish is obtained by first producing a Type B finish. The surface shall
then be improved by carefully removing all fins and other projections, thoroughly washing
it down and then filling the most noticeable surface blemishes with a cement and fine
aggregate paste to match the colour of the original concrete. The release agent shall be
carefully chosen to ensure that the concrete surface does not become stained or
discoloured. After the concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down,
where necessary, to produce a smooth and even surface.
E50.2102 Precast Concrete Finish

a) The finish shall be at least equivalent to the following class and finish to BS 8110: Part 1.
i) Special Class.
ii) Type B Finish.
b) The finish shall have the following additional requirements:
i) Crack widths in the exposed surfaces of the concrete shall not exceed 0.3mm. Confirm
the name and address of the suppliers at Tender for inspection by the CA.
ii) Beams and columns shall have acid etch treatment. Degree of etching to be medium
etching to match type.
iii) Smooth dense as-struck finish with an acid-washed finish shall be applied to all visible
precast concrete to beams and columns.
iv) A ribbed patterned finish as indicated on the design drawings shall be applied to the
internal face of the vaulted/domed rooflight openings.
v) A smooth, matt, dense, even-coloured, blemish-free concrete surface using grey cement.
vi) The finishes shall be uniform in colour and appearance throughout the works.
vii) The surfaces shall be free from discolouration caused by contamination from release
agent, grout leakage, rust staining or other sources.
viii) Abrupt irregularities shall be not greater than 1mm. Gradual irregularities expressed as
maximum permissible deviation from a 1m straightedge shall not be greater than 3mm.
ix) Produce a smooth even finish with an impervious high quality resin film faced plywood or
acceptable equivalent sheet material arranged in an accepted regular pattern as a feature
of the surface. This shall coincide with the architectural features as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
x) The surface shall be free from discolouration caused by contamination from a release
agent, grout leakage or other sources including reinforcement laying out marking.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
xi) There shall be no uneven distribution of aggregate across all visible faces of concrete
columns and beams.
xii) After acid etching, colour equalizing sealer shall be applied to all visible precast concrete
surfaces.
xiii) Other requirements: Chamfered edges to beams and columns acceptable to the CA.
xiv) Generally, surfaces shall be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and other defects.
Voids shall be kept to an absolute minimum whilst ensuring compliance with other
requirements of the Specification. The following maximum acceptable limits for air
voids/blowholes shall be observed:
• No more than 20mm² of holes for any 100mm x 100mm of surfaces area. Maximum
size of any visible holes is 5mm.
xv) Cover spacers: Do not use without acceptance.
E50.2104 Sizes Generally

a) The precast concrete units shall be worked to sizes defined by the Design Drawings and be
within the recommended deviations. They shall hold out reasonably square at the back, i.e.
without corners broken away whereby the strength of the fixings system may be impaired.
b) Broken corners shall not be permitted to any visible elements.
E50.2105 Moulds Generally

a) Moulds shall be of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to give
compliance with the Specification.
b) Moulds shall be maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defects before
each reuse. Damaged moulds shall not be repaired and reused if this would impair the surface
appearance of the units.
c) Moulds shall be designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.
d) Where applicable, moulds shall be coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which shall not
be allowed to touch the reinforcement. Application shall be such as to prevent puddling or
concentrations in corners, etc.
e) Moulds shall be constructed of mould lining that is an impervious material suitable to provide
the consistency of finish required and selected to provide crisp edge details as indicated on the
Design Drawings. The mould linings shall not be of steel unless agreed with the CA. Materials
for fillets, etc. required to achieve features shall be chosen to provide a finish identical to the
finish to the body of the unit.
f) Any joints and fixings in mould linings shall be sealed to prevent grout loss defects and shall be
such as to result in no visible change in plane of the concrete and no change in the finish
whatsoever.
g) The mould linings shall have no variations in stiffness that may produce differences in vibration
across the mould surface.
h) The mould linings shall be replaced after the agreed maximum number of casts, or upon
discovery of damage or defects whichever is the sooner.
i) Before casting, ensure that moulds have been checked to be free of all dust, reinforcement
clippings or other debris.
j) Moulds inspection: Inform the CA when each mould is complete and not less than 10 days
before commencing manufacture of units.
k) Moulds for features, etc. shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects.
l) Moulds that have been previously used shall be repaired and the edges resealed before they
are assembled. Moulds, which in the opinion of the Contractor have deteriorated to an extent
such that they shall not produce the specified finish, shall not be used for that class or a higher
class of finish.
m) Moulds shall be cut in such a manner that reinforcement and built-in components passing
through the moulds are maintained in position; the joint shall be tight and shall not permit grout
loss.
n) Formers for profiled work, chamfers, splays, rebates, curved troughs and other features shall be

rooflight system.
8/06/07
rigidly and evenly fixed to the formwork along the complete length and shall not permit grout
loss.
o) Moulds shall be designed to be consistent with the geometry and as indicated on the Design
Drawings, subject to the acceptance of the CA. The lines of joints between units shall form
smooth curved lines consistent with the geometry and as indicated on the Design Drawings,
subject to the acceptance of the CA. The number of make-up pieces shall be kept to a
minimum.
p) Holes left by ties and components in concrete surfaces shall be in line horizontally and vertically
and shall form a regular pattern, to the acceptance of the CA.
q) Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, chamfers shall be provided for all external
angles of 90° or less in concrete surfaces with plain or fine finishes.
r) Moulds for curved concrete surfaces shall not be made up of a series of facets, unless
indicated on the Design Drawings.
E50.2106 Materials and Construction for Moulds

a) Materials for moulds shall be obtained from one source. Damaged moulds shall not be used
unless permitted by the CA. Propose materials for use in moulds in the Tender, for acceptance
by the CA.
b) Moulds shall be protected from spillages, rust marks, stains or any other debris or harm
whatsoever.
E50.2107 Built-in Components

a) Built-in components, cast-in items, void formers and box-outs shall be fixed in position before
concreting. Unless permitted by the CA, void formers and box-outs shall not be used instead of
built-in components. Polystyrene shall not be used for void formers and box-outs unless
permitted by the CA.
b) Do not cut hardened concrete to provide holes or chases.
c) Correctly locate and secure pipe sleeves, inserts and ducts in place. Formwork for all openings,
chases and holes in columns and units shall be constructed in such a way that it does not
interfere with the reinforcement.
d) Formwork moulds shall be rigid and free from movement that shall affect their performance with
regard to tolerances or colour of concrete. Allow for all necessary mid-rib reinforcement of the
moulds.
E50.2108 Colour Consistency

a) The consistency of the concrete colour is deemed to be of great importance on the project.
Select all suppliers and materials and all methods to ensure the specified finish and
consistency, including but not limited to the following:
i) Main plant to have consistent supply to achieve specified finish, to acceptance.
ii) Back-up plant selected to achieve equivalent supply.
b) Agree with the CA the colour range that shall be acceptable, based on the on-Site prototype or
other benchmarks or samples which shall then become the colour standard for the project.
E50.2109 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be selected in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN 12620, of
consistent colour, free from absorbent particles that may cause pop-outs and other particles such as
coal and iron sulphide that may be unsightly or cause unacceptable staining. Obtain from one source,
and ensure that adequate supplies can be maintained throughout the contract. Submit evidence to
demonstrate compliance in respect of compressive strength and free water/cement ratio.
E50.2110 Materials Generally

The materials for all the works shall be consistent and from the same source. Bulk purchasing and
premixing a material where inconsistency is a risk (e.g. the aggregate) is essential. The cement shall
be grey ordinary Portland cement unless otherwise stated or agreed with the CA.
E50.2111 Dowels/Fixings
a) All dowels and fixings shall be concealed when fixed in position in the works.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
b) Dowels/fixings shall be stainless steel grade 1.4401 to BS EN 10088 and the relevant precast
concrete standards.
E50.2200 QUALITY AND CONTROL

E50.2201 Quality Control/Monitoring Requirements
a) Proposals shall be submitted for ongoing monitoring and quality control of the concrete with the
Tender submission. Make provision for inspection by the CA prior to precast units leaving the
factory.
b) Set up a system of “Hold” and “Monitor” points in the works to ensure that the quality achieved
is accepted by the CA prior to further pours proceeding.
c) As soon as possible after any concrete has been deemed as unacceptable within the
requirements of the Specification, submit proposals to the CA for the removal and
reconstruction of that section of the works. This requirement applies to all elements of the
works.
E50.2202 Batching, Mixing and Transport

a) Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that accurate and consistent batching and mixing are
carried out to achieve the specified quality of finish e.g. added water shall allow for the moisture
content of the aggregate to achieve a similar slump for each mix.
b) Proposals shall be submitted with the Tender, which shall have to be expanded upon if
acceptable, together with a demonstration of the proposed methods of practice by constructing
the full size quality-control prototype.
c) Consideration shall be given to the use of a dedicated main mixing and batching plant to avoid
contamination of the mix. A stand-by back-up plant shall also be available that is capable of
providing equivalent mix and batching facilities. The use or otherwise of such a plant shall be
stated in the Contract documentation.
E50.2203 Generally
Conform to the procedures of BS 8110, BS 8297, the requirements of Section H11 as applicable
and the requirements of all relevant National Standards. Provide Working Drawings for all precast
concrete for review by the CA.
E50.2205 Inserts, Holes and Chases

a) Confirm all positions and details to ensure that alterations to and decisions about the size and
location of inserts, holes and chases are not made without the knowledge and acceptance of
the CA.
b) Fix inserts or box-outs as required in the correct positions before placing concrete. Form all
holes and chases. Do not cut hardened concrete without acceptance.
c) Ensure that all fixings and holding-down bolts, etc. are not disturbed or damaged during
construction.
E50.2206 Production Control Unit(s)

a) The first unit produced of each type shall be inspected at the works by the CA. If its
appearance is accepted it shall be clearly marked and kept safely at the factory as a control
standard for appearance of subsequently produced units.
b) Allow for inspection of all units at the works and provide adequate space and facilities for full
inspection of all surfaces.
E50.2207 Inspection
Carefully inspect and check all completed units for match with accepted sample(s) or control unit(s)
and compliance with the Specification before dispatch to Site. Make arrangements with the CA for
him to inspect the completed units in the factory.
E50.2208 Records
a) Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:
i) Unique identification number.
ii) Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iii) Date of each stage of manufacture.

iv) Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
v) Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
vi) Specific location in the finished work.
vii) Details of any damage.
viii) Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is an accepted production control unit.
b) Records shall be available for inspection on request.
E50.2209 Mix Proportions and Aggregate

Select mix proportions and aggregate to achieve the specified colour to match the agreed sample.
E50.2210 Damaged Units

a) Making good shall be minimal and consistent to an accepted sample. As far as possible the
finished surface shall be achieved without making good. The improvement of the surface finish
by the Contractor (e.g. filling noticeable surface blemishes) shall be agreed with the CA, prior to
any work being carried out. Blowholes shall be filled and all irregularities stoned off. Provide
continuity of personnel for making good, where required, to the complete satisfaction of the CA.
b) Components having arrises or faces that are broken, chipped, cracked, crazed, honeycombed,
irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marred such that their appearance or performance
is impaired shall not be acceptable.
c) Submit finished samples to the CA for his acceptance prior to commencement. Finished
samples of precast concrete units which have been submitted and accepted by the CA shall be
used as reference samples for all precast units prior to being passed for inclusion into the
works, to the satisfaction of the CA. Precast units may be rejected for the following reasons:
i) Exceeding specified construction tolerances for units.
ii) Chipped, spalled or cracked units or other damage incurred during transport or
construction operations.
iii) Exposed-to-view surfaces that develop surface finish deficiencies.
iv) Other defects as listed including:
• Ragged or irregular edges.
• Finish quality below standard set by samples or mock-up.
• Excessive air voids/blowholes on exposed surfaces.
• Casting lines evident from different placements.
• Visible form joints or irregular surfaces.
• Stains on unit surfaces.
• Non-uniformity of colour and texture.
• Effects of grout seepage.
• Areas of any back-up concrete bleeding through facing concrete.
• Foreign material embedded in face.
• Visible repairs.
• Reinforcement shadow lines.
• Visible cracks.
• Any damage due to erection methods, propping panels, etc.
d) Provide method statement demonstrating how damage will be avoided during all stages of
manufacture, installation and transportation.
E50.3000 SITE INSTALLATION

rooflight system.
8/06/07
E50.3100 SITE CONTROL

E50.3101 Storage
All materials shall be suitably stored on Site, clear of the ground with protection from inclement
weather and contamination by other materials and kept dry. Precast concrete units shall be stored so
as to prevent soiling, chipping and any mechanical damage, contamination by salts and other
deleterious substances.
E50.3102 Setting Out

Be responsible for providing full setting-out drawings of all precast units, for acceptance by the CA.
E50.3103 Installation and Propping

a) Design and develop methods of propping and alignment of precast units to achieve accurate
positioning without any damage or effects on the finishes of the units whatsoever.
b) Consider locating self-aligning/locating heads, etc. within recesses for light fittings, etc.
E50.3104 Final Fixings

a) Ensure that the appearance of each elevation is acceptable before tightening the fixings, filling
the bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing the joints.
b) Where appropriate, tighten the threaded fastenings to the torque figures recommended in
writing by the manufacturer. Do not overtighten restraint fixings intended to permit lateral
movement.
c) Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices shall be filled with a polyester mix, be well tamped in
and shall not be in the visible faces of the unit without prior agreement.
E50.3105 Damaged Units

Do not repair without acceptance. Such acceptance shall not be given where the units are damaged
or where the proposed repair would impair appearance or performance.
E50.3106 Cleaning
a) Clean dirt or blemishes from exposed surfaces.
b) Wash and rinse in accordance with the precast concrete manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Protect adjacent surfaces from damage caused by cleaning operations.
d) Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could alter the character of exposed finishes.
E50.3107 Accuracy of Erection

a) The structure, including any fixing inserts, shall be surveyed fully before commencing erection.
b) Each precast concrete unit shall be clearly marked with its identification symbol relative to its
position within the wall/soffit layout. Production and storage of units shall be arranged so that
delivery in accurate sequence for Site fixing is possible.
c) Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across transverse joints) the
greatest width shall not vary by more than ±2mm. Any variation shall be evenly distributed with
no sudden changes.
d) The average width of an individual joint between units, compared with the nominal design width
of the joint as specified, shall not vary by more than ±2mm.
e) Unit edges at a joint out of parallel shall not taper by more than 3mm, in overall height of joint
between units.
f) A jog in alignment of a unit edge from one unit to another shall not exceed 2mm.
g) The offset in planes between the vertical faces of adjacent units across any joint shall not
exceed 2mm.
h) Aligning heads shall be incorporated into the units so as to be concealed in the final works.
E50.3200 PROTECTION
E50.3201 Protection of the Works
a) Provide full and adequate protection for the works against the effects of weather, until the
rooflight system.
8/06/07
building is watertight, during storage, handling, and transport and during and after installation.
b) Provide full and adequate protection for the works, until Practical Completion of the project,
against damage or accidental spillage of liquids that may discolour the concrete finishes.
c) The protective measures used shall not in any way permanently mark or damage the concrete
finishes.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
G10 PRIMARY/SECONDARY STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
(ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS) ...........................................................................3
G10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
G10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

G10.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1200 DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES................................................................................................... 3
Paint to Internal Exposed Mild Steel.......................................................................................................................................... 3
G10.1201 Paint to Internal Exposed Steels for Type IWS-01 ..............................................................................................................3
G10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

G10.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
G10.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
G10.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
G10.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1306 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
G10.1307 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1308 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1309 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1310 Testing Authority.............................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1311 Products ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1312 Defective Work ...............................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1313 Evidence of Performance .............................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

General ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
G10.1401 Visual Requirements ......................................................................................................................................................................5
For the purpose of conforming with visual requirements, the work shall be viewed with normal eyesight from a distance of 2m for
colour consistency and excessive fading and 1m for cracking, pitting and other defects..........................................6
G10.1402 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1403 Appearance......................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1404 Deleterious Materials.....................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1405 Gloss Levels ....................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1406 Scratch Resistance........................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1407 Life Expectancy ...............................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1408 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION ............................................... 7
G10.2200 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND FINISHES.................................................. 7

G10.2201 Source of Materials........................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.2206 Two Pack Zinc Rich Primer, Isocyanate Free Acrylic Polysiloxane, Compliant Coating..............................................7
G10.2212 Coating Materials ...........................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.2213 Preparation Materials and Ancillaries ........................................................................................................................................7
G10.2214 Fire Proofing ....................................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 7
G10.3200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTIVE COATING WORK ....................... 7

G10.3201 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.3202 Finishes .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
G10.3202 Removal of Coatings by Sandblasting......................................................................................................................................9
G10.3205 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3206 Handling and Storing Coated Steelwork .................................................................................................................................9
G10.3207 Protection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3208 Remedial Work ...............................................................................................................................................................................9
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and G10/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
G10.3300 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING ..................................................................................... 9

G10.3301 Preparation Generally....................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3302 Off-Site Preparation and Painting........................................................................................................................................... 10
G10.3303 Touching-up for Factory-applied Finishes ............................................................................................................................ 10
G10.3304 Inaccessible Surfaces ................................................................................................................................................................ 10
G10.3311 Site Preparation of Shop Painted Steelwork ....................................................................................................................... 11
G10.3400 PAINTING .........................................................................................................................11

G10.3401 Suitability of Conditions............................................................................................................................................................. 11
G10.3402 Applying Coatings....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
G10.3403 Film Thickness.............................................................................................................................................................................. 11
G10.3404 Stripe Coats ................................................................................................................................................................................. 12

rooflight system.
8/06/07
G10 PRIMARY/SECONDARY STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

(ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS)
To be read in conjunction with Section A, the Structural Engineer's Specification and other related
sections of the Specification, Preliminaries and Contract Conditions.
G10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
G10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

G10.1101 Descriptive Works
a) Refer to the Structural Engineer's Specification for details of steelwork.
b) This particular work section deals with finishes to structural steelwork and shall be read in
conjunction with the Structural Steelwork Specification.
c) This Addendum Specification includes surface preparation, primers, fillers, etc. and
requirements for the application of coatings to surfaces identified on the Design Drawings and
Schedules.
d) Provide the final paint system including requirements for primers, corrosion protection and
decorative coatings.
e) Achieve the visual, aesthetic requirements for all visible painting as described in the
Specification to the satisfaction of the Architect.
f) Provide all submittals as specified herein and in the Structural Engineer's Specification.
g) Where no product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable materials and
systems prior to Contract award which comply with the visual intent and performance criteria
stated and remain fully responsible for the selection of materials/performance requirements.
h) Where a particular product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, complete the installation
using that product, or such other confirmed as acceptable by the Architect in writing, whilst
remaining fully responsible for the selection of materials, performance requirements and quality
of workmanship.
G10.1102 Scope of Works

This section of the Specification, when read in conjunction with the Design Drawings and the
Structural Engineer's Specification for structural steelwork, provides particular requirements with
respect to the following:
a) Architectural quality steelwork visible in the finished works as follows:
i) IWS-01
b) Protective coatings and finishes to internal exposed steelwork.
G10.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
b) Ensure that all interfaces are fully co-ordinated prior to commencement.
G10.1200 DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES
Paint to Internal Exposed Mild Steel.
G10.1201 Paint to Internal Exposed Steels for Type IWS-01

a) Location: Internal exposed non-rated steelwork Incorporated into Type IWS-01.
b) Painting:
i) Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a
surface equivalent in cleanliness to SA 2.5 quality of BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1. In general
this shall be achieved by acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil, grease,
welding slag, etc. renders this ineffective, and in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally
blast cleaned to SA 2.5 quality of BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Paint type: Two pack high solids zinc rich primer, isocyanate free acrylic polysiloxane
compliant coating.
iii) Paint System manufacturer: International Coatings or Jotun Ltd. or acceptable equivalent.
iv) Degrease with recommended degreasing solution and flash blast or abrade as
recommended by the manufacturer, rinse and allow to dry.
v) Steels shall receive a factory applied primer as recommended by the manufacturer. Dry
Film Thickness: 75 microns minimum. Colour: Grey. Special Requirements: VOC: 189
grms/ litre Volume Solids: 73%.
vi) Shop Top Coat:
• Dry film thickness (nominal): 125 microns.
• Colour: To be confirmed.
• Special Requirements: VOC: 165 grms/ litre Volume Solids: 76%.
• Gloss level of finish coat: Matt finish. The required matt/ gloss percentage shall be
30% gloss: 70% matt is to be confirmed.
c) Site treatment:
i) Transport and erection damage shall be made good as follows:
• Small chips and damage back to bare steel shall be wire brushed to Swedish
Standard ST3.
• Touch up damage to primer to equal the specified microns nominal dry film
thickness.
• Touch up by brush application of top coatings as recommended by the
manufacturer.
G10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
G10.1301 Tender Response

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Technical data including inspection proposals, workmanship and application methods,
touching-up proposals, testing data and material properties including generic descriptions
of materials for all products to be used.
ii) Full details of corrosion treatments, primers and all coating systems, materials and
suppliers where different from those specified.
iii) Confirmation that the specified gloss/ matt percentage can be achieved.
iv) Details of life predicted expectancy details/ periods up to and after first maintenance,
including a specification for maintenance and recoating (by others).
v) Full information relating to Health and Safety, including details of any hazardous materials.
G10.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Sufficient samples of the following, including relevant trade literature and technical specifications,
shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
300mm x 300mm sample of each type to specified substrate.
G10.1303 Post Contract Samples

rooflight system.
8/06/07
In accordance with Section A.4000, post contract samples of the following shall be provided:
Sample of flat plate (approximately 500mm square) coated with each type of protective coating and
architectural finish specified. Following acceptance this sample shall be kept at the works and used
as a reference to establish consistency of finished work during the course of the application and will
be a point of reference regarding quality of finish to be achieved.
G10.1304 Mock-ups
Not required.
G10.1305 Prototypes
Not required.
G10.1306 Benchmark Requirements

The following quality benchmarks shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
First 9m² or 5m of each type in location to be agreed.
Testing
G10.1307 Inspection
Permit the Architect, and/or an appointed independent inspection authority, to inspect the work at all
reasonable times and at all places where it is being carried out. Provide all facilities, hand tools,
lighting, etc. as necessary to ensure adequate inspection.
G10.1308 Testing
Arrange for testing to be carried out as directed by the Architect. Prepare any necessary test pieces.
Submit copies of all test and examination results to the Architect as soon as they are available.
G10.1309 Test Requirements

a) Adhesion testing as specified.
b) Solvent test as specified.
c) Film thickness assessments as specified.
d) All other testing as specified and as applicable.
G10.1310 Testing Authority

An authority to be decided by the Architect shall carry out all tests.
G10.1311 Products
When requested by the Architect, submit a copy of test certificates for finishes to steelwork.
G10.1312 Defective Work

As soon as possible after any part of the work or any materials are known or suspected to be
defective, submit proposals to the Architect for further testing, inspection or replacement and obtain
instructions.
G10.1313 Evidence of Performance

a) If it is proposed to use manufacturers different from those specified, provide technical
information/test certificates to demonstrate that paints meet the requirements of the
Specification.
b) Testing and provision of data does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding
the performance requirements, service life and warranties given.
G10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

requirements.
General
G10.1401 Visual Requirements

a) The definitions contained in BS 2015 and BS EN 971: Part 1 shall be used to define adhesion,

rooflight system.
8/06/07
excess fading, non-uniformity of colour, cracking, peeling, pitting or other visual defects. None
of the defects shall be acceptable.
b) Visual requirements shall be based upon samples submitted and agreed.
For the purpose of conforming with visual requirements, the work shall be viewed with normal eyesight from a distance
of 2m for colour consistency and excessive fading and 1m for cracking, pitting and other defects.G10.1402
General
The work shall maintain the specified appearance and performance for the specified period to first
maintenance period without failure resulting from inappropriate material selection or defects in either
materials or workmanship. Failure shall be defined as excessive fading, excessive non-uniformity of
colour or shade, discolouration, yellowing, cracking, peeling, pitting or other defects identified in BS
2015 and BS EN 971: Part 1 within the following limits:
a) Excessive fading: A change in appearance which is perceptible and unacceptable, as
determined by the Engineer, when visually compared with the original range samples from a
distance of 2m (under the agreed lighting conditions).
b) Cracking, peeling, pitting or other defects that are discernible (by the Engineer) when viewed
from a distance of 1m, or which result in any corrosion or impairment to the substrate.
c) All finished surfaces shall be subject to visual inspection and be accepted by the Engineer. No
areas of unfinished material shall be visible in the finished work.
d) Visual requirements shall be based upon samples submitted and agreed.
G10.1403 Appearance
a) All finishes shall be stable, fade resistant and not affected by ultraviolet light. Provide data and
samples for review by the Engineer.
b) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and be resilient to all known and/ or
specified environmental and pollution effects. This shall include scratching and cigarette smoke
and burns, etc. Submit data and samples for review by the Engineer.
c) Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer's
recommended products and system, matching original finish for colour, texture and gloss.
Repair coatings shall be visually acceptable to the Engineer. Confirmation shall be provided that
the damaged finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification. Guarantee
in writing that the damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed remedial paint
system. Employ an independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection and any
necessary tests and supply a full report to the Engineer.
d) All finishes shall be within the limits of the agreed samples and without irregularities or
distortions. Fixings, stiffeners, etc. which are not intended to be visible shall be treated so that
there is no discontinuity in the finished surface appearance.
G10.1404 Deleterious Materials

All materials, constituent parts of the painting and protective coating systems, primers and cleansing
agents, etc. shall be lead free. See also Section A for Hazardous Materials.
G10.1405 Gloss Levels

Specular gloss levels specified shall be measured in accordance with BS EN ISO 2813.
G10.1406 Scratch Resistance

Paints used shall comply with the minimum requirements of BS EN ISO 1518 “Scratch test”.
G10.1407 Life Expectancy

a) For the decorative coatings to first maintenance shall be a minimum of 15 years
b) The maintenance procedure for the decorative finishes for the steelwork paint/ protective
coatings systems shall be clarified/ confirmed by the Contractor at Tender stage. The paint/
coating manufacturer shall provide a written specification at the time of Tender for recoating at
the end of the life expectancy period including time for reapplication.
G10.1408 Inspection
Together with the applicator, where Site coats are to be applied, alert the paint manufacturer seven
days prior to the start of the application programme and permit the paint manufacturer to inspect the

rooflight system.
8/06/07
work in progress and prepare inspection reports in accordance with the standard conditions of
Contract. The paint manufacturer shall forward a copy of any inspection report direct to the Architect.
Technical support from the paint manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of his contractual
responsibility to ensure that the coatings are applied in accordance with the Specification. Where the
paint manufacturer does not have an inspection/quality control support system, then employ an
independent testing authority to verify compliance of the coating systems with the Specification.
G10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION
G10.2200 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND FINISHES

G10.2201 Source of Materials
a) Coating materials shall be obtained from one source and the Architect shall be notified of the
selected manufacturer before the works commence.
b) All materials used shall be as recommended for the intended application and a warranty shall be
provided from the manufacturer for the particular surface and the conditions of exposure. They
shall be compatible with each other.
G10.2206 Two Pack Zinc Rich Primer, Isocyanate Free Acrylic Polysiloxane, Compliant Coating
a) Location: Internal exposed steelwork.
b) Shop primer:
i) Dry film thickness: 75 microns minimum.
ii) Colour: Grey.
iii) Special requirements: Maximum V.O.C. 189gms/litre. Volume solids: 73%.
c) Shop topcoat:
i) Dry film thickness: 100 microns minimum.
ii) Colour: As required by the Architect.
iii) Special requirements: Maximum V.O.C. 165gms/litre. Volume solids: 76%.
d) Refer to the manufacturer’s recommended working procedures to be read in conjunction with
the technical data sheet and material safety data sheet. Provided information to be strictly
adhered to.
G10.2212 Coating Materials

a) Ensure, whenever possible, that coating materials are from one manufacturing batch. Where
more than one batch is to be used, keep separate, allocate to distinct parts or areas of the
work, and inform the Architect accordingly.
b) Check that all coating materials to be used are recommended by their manufacturers for the
particular surface and conditions of exposure, and that they are compatible with each other.
c) Ensure that coating materials are obtained from only one manufacturer unless specified
otherwise. Inform the Architect of the selected manufacturer at an early date.
G10.2213 Preparation Materials and Ancillaries

Preparation, materials and ancillaries shall be of the types recommended by their manufacturers and
the protective coating manufacturer for the surfaces being prepared.
G10.2214 Fire Proofing

a) Propose a proprietary product that carries all the necessary test and performance guarantees.
Submit samples of the finished fire proofing to the Architect for review before work commences
on Site.
G10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
G10.3200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTIVE COATING WORK

G10.3201 General
a) Work shall comply with BS 8000: Part 12, BS 6150, BS EN ISO 12944 and any additional

rooflight system.
8/06/07
requirements of the Specification.

b) All coatings shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
c) The paint/ coatings applicator shall confirm in writing that the cleaners and paint/ coatings
system used will not affect any surrounding sealants or construction elements. Provide written
confirmation by the manufacturer regarding compatibility.
d) When removing or partially removing coatings, the methods used shall not damage the
substrate or adjacent surfaces nor adversely affect subsequent coatings.
e) Materials used in preparation shall be of the types recommended by their manufacturers and by
the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
f) Surfaces shall be fully rubbed down and prepared. The primer and corrosion protection coats of
any steelwork shall be touched up after removing, or partially removing, existing coatings. The
methods used shall not damage the substrate or adjacent surfaces, nor adversely affect
subsequent coatings. The preparatory coatings used shall be of the types recommended by the
coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared to receive new finishes.
g) Oil based stoppers/fillers shall be applied after priming; water based stoppers/fillers shall be
used before priming unless otherwise recommended in writing by the manufacturer. Water
based stoppers/fillers shall be patched after priming.
h) There shall be an interval of at least the periods recommended in writing by the manufacturer
between successive coats of paint.
i) Application of coatings shall not occur until the surfaces and conditions within any given area to
receive the specified coatings are acceptable.
j) Unless otherwise agreed or specified, all coats to be spray applied in thicknesses and layers as
specified in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure curing and
resilience of coatings as soon as possible.
k) Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour, free from brush
marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
l) Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating curing and drying. Adequately protect
completed work from damage until full resilience is achieved.
m) Brushes shall comply with the requirements of BS 2992.
n) Brushing generally shall comply with the requirements of BS 6150 and BS 2992.
o) Roller application shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6150.
p) Spray application shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6150 generally.
Submit details of the spraying equipment for review by the Engineer. Comply with all Health and
Safety requirements for spraying.
q) All surfaces shall be keyed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written
recommendations to accept the subsequent paint/ protective coating system by mechanical or
chemical etching wherever appropriate. The use of the adhesion promotion systems shall be
selected to comply with the requirements of the refinishing system specification and methods of
application.
G10.3202 Finishes
a) Once applied the finish shall not in any way slump, flow, crack, flake, split, sag, pit, bubble,
blister, float, effloresce, craze, shrink, break, wrinkle, crinkle, yellow, chalk, fade, discolour,
powder, stain, bleed or lose its finish or gloss in any way, taking full account of the extremes of
all atmospheric and environmental conditions for the service life specified and during
construction.
b) Paints shall not be overthinned so as to change in any way the surface colour, gloss, opacity or
finish and nothing shall be added to paints to change in any way the consistency or constitution.
Thinning shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations and
the express agreement of the Engineer.
c) All necessary controls shall be undertaken to ensure uniformity in manufacture and to maintain
uniformity of all surface finishes for the works.
d) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and shall be resilient.
e) All finishes shall be uniform in texture, colour and appearance within the limits of the agreed

rooflight system.
8/06/07
samples and without irregularities or distortion. When applying matt coatings apply brush
strokes and lay off using criss-cross strokes (switching) rather than in one direction. Specular
gloss levels shall be tested to BS EN ISO 2813. Finish coatings shall match the colour and
sheen of the agreed control samples.
f) There shall be an interval of at least 24 hours between successive coats of painting, or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
g) Zinc rich primers shall comply with BS 4652.
G10.3202 Removal of Coatings by Sandblasting

Removal of existing coatings, by sandblasting, shall be carried out by specialists using abrasives and
pressures appropriate to the substrate. Take all necessary precautions to minimise dust and residues.
G10.3205 Inspection
a) Applicator to alert the paint manufacturer where their paint system is being applied to inspect
works in progress and prepare inspection reports in accordance with their standard conditions
of contract. The manufacturer to forward copies of any inspection reports direct to the
Architect. Technical support from the manufacturer does not relieve the applicator of his
contractual responsibility to ensure that the coatings are applied in accordance with the
Specification.
b) Notify the Architect of projected dates for start of surface preparation and coating.
c) Give the Architect at least 7 days' notice before coated members or components leave the
works.
G10.3206 Handling and Storing Coated Steelwork

a) Use methods and equipment that minimise chafing, chipping and other damage to coated
components.
b) Ensure an adequate drying/curing period for each coat before handling.
c) Use suitable packings, lashings, lifting harnesses, nylon slings, rubber protected chains and
chocks, etc.
d) Stack coated components clear of the ground, separated by timber chocks, so that ponding
does not occur.
G10.3207 Protection
a) Adequately protect freshly applied surface coatings from damage.
b) Exhibit `Wet Paint' signs and provide protective barriers where necessary.
c) Adequately protect surfaces adjacent to those being covered.
G10.3208 Remedial Work

a) Ensure that early degradation of coatings by blistering, peeling, flaking, cracking, lack of
adhesion, etc. is made good by complete removal, preparation and reapplication of all coats, as
instructed.
b) Ensure that inadequate dry film thickness or surface defects due to inclement weather may,
depending on the type of paint, be remedied by rubbing down and applying further coat(s), as
instructed.
c) Any painted area mechanically damaged in transit or at site is to be hand or power tool cleaned
to St2 standard (ISO 8501: Part 1). Touch up bare areas with surface tolerant epoxy to meet
original works dry film thickness followed by specified topcoat where applicable leaving a neat
continuous and flat finish. Adhere to the manufacturer of the paint systems recommendations
regarding appropriate method of application.
d) Where damage to coatings or subsequent surface preparation has exposed bare metal, ensure
that it is thoroughly cleaned and primed within two hours.
G10.3300 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING

G10.3301 Preparation Generally
a) Ensure that the surface preparation is sufficient to meet the Design and service life expectancy
of the Specification and is carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

rooflight system.
8/06/07
recommendations.
b) Comply with BS 6150 and BS 8000: Part 12, Section 2 and additional requirements in this
Specification.
c) When removing or partially removing coatings, use methods that will not damage the substrate
or adjacent surfaces, nor adversely affect subsequent coatings.
d) Materials used in preparation to be types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating
manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
e) Prevent or control exposure of operatives to dust, vapour and fumes exceeding occupational
exposure standards set in the current Health and Safety Executive (HSE) document EH40.
f) Substrates shall be sufficiently dry in depth to suit the coating to be applied.
g) Remove efflorescence salts from surfaces. Repeat removal if efflorescence recurs.
h) Clean off dirt, grease and oil from surfaces. If contamination of surfaces/ substrates has
occurred, obtain instructions before proceeding.
i) Unless otherwise specified or agreed, cleaning shall be carried out with an anti-silicone solution
with lint free cloths, the solution shall have a neutral pH to ensure that it is not detrimental,
should any spillage occur.
j) Remove dust and particles from dry abrasive preparation of surfaces.
k) Remove residues from wet preparation of surfaces by rinsing with clean water, wiping and
allowing to dry.
l) Where the preparation of the metal exposes bare steel or zinc galvanising, either chromate
passivation, phosphate treatment, mordant (zinc only), as applicable or an appropriate etch
primer shall be applied before the chosen paint/ protective coating system is used.
G10.3302 Off-Site Preparation and Painting

Carry out off-Site preparation and painting under cover and in properly lit, heated and ventilated
conditions. Select the sequence of working from one of the following and inform the Engineer before
starting work:
a) Fabricate, blast clean and prime as specified.
b) Blast clean, fabricate and prime as specified (immediately before priming remove flash rust with
a light overall sweep blast).
c) Blast clean and prime with a weldable prefabrication primer recommended in writing by the
manufacturer of the specified primer. Fabricate and prime as specified.
G10.3303 Touching-up for Factory-applied Finishes

a) Comply with the requirements of BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS 6150.
b) Any areas of transit or erection damage shall be touched up in accordance with the paint
system manufacturer's recommendations to leave surfaces indistinguishable from the factory-
applied finish.
c) Ensure that Site-applied touch-up colours match exactly.
d) Ensure that protective base coats are repaired to provide full corrosion protection to equal the
factory corrosion protection.
e) Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from dirt, grease or any deleterious substances
incompatible with the painting system.
G10.3304 Inaccessible Surfaces

Ensure that the sequence of working shall be such as to ensure that surfaces inaccessible after
assembly receive the full specified treatment and coating system including, if necessary, local shop
application of Site coatings.
G10.3303 Blast Cleaning for Painting
a) Ensure that steel complies with Sa 2.5 preparation grade (ISO 8501: Part 1) at the time of
blasting as follows:
i) Dry blasting: Initial rust grade A or B.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Wet blasting: Initial rust grade A, B or C.

b) Thoroughly degrease. Remove millscale by chipping, grinding and/or heat treatment.
c) Blast clean to Sa 2.5 quality as ISO 8501: Part 1 preparation grade, and control quality of
preparation in accordance with BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS EN ISO
14713. Use an abrasive of a suitable type and size, as recommended in writing by the paint
system manufacturer(s), free from contamination by fines, water and oil. Remove abrasive
residues.
d) Remove all surface defects likely to be detrimental to the protective painting system, including:
i) Defects in the steel, including cracks, surface laminations, shelling and deep pitting as
required by BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10025: Parts 1-6 and BS EN 10210: Part
1.
ii) Defects resulting from fabrication, including fins at cuts, burrs, sharp edges and weld
spatter.
e) Apply primer as soon as practicable and while the surface is still in a condition acceptable to
the primer manufacturer.
G10.3311 Site Preparation of Shop Painted Steelwork

Carry out all necessary remedial work as specified and prepare all surfaces by abrading and/or
washing down as recommended in writing by the manufacturer before applying coats.
G10.3400 PAINTING
G10.3401 Suitability of Conditions
a) Do not apply coatings:
i) To surfaces affected by moisture or frost.
ii) Unless the steel temperature is at least 3°C above the dew point with conditions stable or
improving.
iii) Unless the relative humidity is below 85%.
iv) When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.
b) Take all necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours, providing temporary
protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that coatings are not adversely affected by
climatic conditions before, during and after application.
c) Take responsibility for the application of coatings and ensure the suitability of surfaces and
conditions within any given area.
G10.3402 Applying Coatings

a) Ensure that adjacent coats of the same material are of a different tint to ensure that each coat
provides complete coverage.
b) Multiple coats of the same material to be of a different tint to ensure that each coat provides
complete coverage. Choice of colour for the undercoat shall be made to complement the
finished topcoat colour to avoid any colour variation showing through the topcoat.
c) Apply coatings to clean, rust free, suitably dry surfaces in dry atmospheric conditions and after
any previous coats have cured adequately.
d) Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour, free from brush
marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
e) Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying. Adequately protect
completed work from damage.
G10.3403 Film Thickness

a) Check the thickness of each coat during application using a wet film thickness wheel or comb
in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808.
b) After each coat has dried, measure the total accumulated dry film thickness using a magnetic or
electromagnetic meter, checked against standard shims and recalibrated regularly against a
smooth steel reference plate, the number and position of measurements to be as directed by
the Architect. Carry out all measurements in the presence of the Architect, unless otherwise
rooflight system.
8/06/07
directed.
c) Over any square metre of coating ensure that the average accumulated dry film thickness is
equal to or exceeds the specified thickness, with no reading less than 75% of the specified
thickness. Where a minimum dry film thickness has been specified, any areas found to be below
the specified figure shall be made good at no extra cost to the Client.
d) If at any stage the accumulated dry film thickness is deficient, apply additional coats at no extra
cost.
e) The dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque
appearance, irrespective of the number of applied topcoats necessary to achieve cosmetic
obliteration of the undercoat. The full specified topcoat dry film thickness shall be maintained
notwithstanding any greater than specified undercoat dry film thickness.
G10.3404 Stripe Coats

Stripe coating of the welds and the corners of any flanges or edges, nuts and bolt heads, rough weld
seams and areas that are difficult to access shall be carried out by brush prior to the spray application
of the specified primer.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
H11 ROOF AND WALL SYSTEMS............................................................................5
H11.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 5
H11.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 5

H11.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1103 Interfaces ..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 5

Souk External Wall Cladding Systems ..................................................................................................................................... 5
H11.1201 Type EWS-01 Cladding System ...............................................................................................................................................5
H11.1207 Type EWS-07 Walling System ..................................................................................................................................................8
H11.1209 Type EWS-18 Temporary Cladding system. ..........................................................................................................................8
Roofglazing Systems..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
H11.1240 Type RFL-01 Roofglazing System .............................................................................................................................................9
H11.1242 Type RFL-03A Roofglazing System ..........................................................................................................................................9
H11.1243 Type RFL-03C Roofglazing System..........................................................................................................................................9
Internal Walling Systems........................................................................................................................................................... 10
H11.1261 Type IWS-01 Internal Walling System .................................................................................................................................. 10
Shading Devices.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
H11.1271 Type SHD-01 Shading Device ................................................................................................................................................ 11
Glass Doors.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11
H11.1281 Type EDR-01 Bronze Doors .................................................................................................................................................... 11
H11.1282 Type EDR-02 Bronze Doors .................................................................................................................................................... 11
H11.1284 Type EDR-04 Aluminium Doors .............................................................................................................................................. 11
H11.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING ........................................................................................11

Tender Submittals ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
H11.1301 Tender Response ........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks .............................................................................................. 12
H11.1302 Pre-contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................ 12
H11.1303 Post Contract Samples ............................................................................................................................................................. 13
H11.1304 Mock-up Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 13
H11.1305 Prototype Requirements............................................................................................................................................................ 13
H11.1306 Benchmark Requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
H11.1307 Previous/ Comparative Testing Certification........................................................................................................................ 14
H11.1308 Testing of Prototypes ................................................................................................................................................................. 14
H11.1309 Standard Test Apparatus and Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 14
H11.1310 Air Permeability Tests................................................................................................................................................................. 14
H11.1311 Façade Floor Air Leakage Testing. (To be confirmed by CA).......................................................................................... 15
H11.1312 Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests........................................................................................................................ 15
H11.1313 Wind Resistance Tests.............................................................................................................................................................. 15
H11.1314 Impact Testing.............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
H11.1315 Off-Site Test Sequence............................................................................................................................................................. 16
H11.1316 Acoustic Testing – Initial Advance Test ................................................................................................................................ 16
H11.1317 Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 16
H11.1318 Site Hose Testing........................................................................................................................................................................ 18
H11.1319 Testing of Fixings......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
H11.1320 Thermal Cycling Tests................................................................................................................................................................ 18
H11.1321 Building Movements/Racking Procedure Tests .................................................................................................................. 18
H11.1322 Discretionary Tests - Screen Cladding – Noise and Vibration ....................................................................................... 18
H11.1323 Fire Tests ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
H11.1324 Results and Certificates ............................................................................................................................................................ 19
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and H11/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
H11.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS..............................................................................19

General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
H11.1401 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Structural Performance.............................................................................................................................................................. 19
H11.1402 Specific Movements ................................................................................................................................................................... 19
H11.1403 Deflections .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
H11.1404 Design Loads ............................................................................................................................................................................... 20
H11.1405 Seismic Loads.............................................................................................................................................................................. 20
H11.1406 Imposed Gravity Loads .............................................................................................................................................................. 20
H11.1407 Live Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
H11.1408 Imposed Movements .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
H11.1409 Wind/Air Pressure Loads.......................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1410 Thermal Movement...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1411 Inertial Loads ................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
H11.1412 Exceptional Loads ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1413 Strength of Doors........................................................................................................................................................................ 22
Environmental Performance...................................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1414 Moisture Movement .................................................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1415 Thermal Performance Requirements ...................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1416 Solar Performance Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1417 Air Permeability/Infiltration......................................................................................................................................................... 24
H11.1418 Condensation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1419 Capillarity....................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1420 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ....................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1421 Local Factors ................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
Acoustic ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
H11.1422 Acoustic Performance Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 26
H11.1423 Flanking Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Fire .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
H11.1424 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
H11.1425 Surface Spread of Flame........................................................................................................................................................... 26
H11.1426 Fire and Smoke Stopping ......................................................................................................................................................... 26
H11.1427 Fire Resistance ............................................................................................................................................................................ 26
H11.1428 Joint System Required ............................................................................................................................................................... 27
H11.1430 Fire Stopping between Floors.................................................................................................................................................. 27
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
H11.1431 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
H11.1432 Impact and Abrasion Resistance............................................................................................................................................. 27
H11.1433 Demountability.............................................................................................................................................................................. 27
Components ................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
H11.1434 Primary Components.................................................................................................................................................................. 27
H11.1435 Secondary Components............................................................................................................................................................ 28
Services ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1436 Cables within Box Sections...................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1437 Opening Lights ............................................................................................................................................................................ 28
Blinds.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
H11.1438 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION ................................................28
H11.2100 SYSTEMS .........................................................................................................................28

Wall Cladding Systems ............................................................................................................................................................. 28
H11.2101 Framing to Screen Cladding .................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.2102 Bronze Cladding/Screens/Framing/Features ...................................................................................................................... 30
H11.2103 Insulated Backing Wall System ............................................................................................................................................... 30
H11.2104 Aluminium Louvres ...................................................................................................................................................................... 31
H11.2105 Timber Cladding/Screens/Framing/Solar Shading/Features .......................................................................................... 31
H11.2106 Aluminium Shading Devices..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
H11.2110 Glass Types (Refer to section Z25 for general glass clauses) ....................................................................................... 32
Blinds.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 32
H11.2112 Fabric Blinds to Rooflights (SHD-04) ................................................................................................................................... 32
H11.2114 Floor Channel Profiles................................................................................................................................................................ 33
H11.2200 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................33

General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
H11.2201 Fabric Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Frames............................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
H11.2202 Glass Retaining Frames Generally ......................................................................................................................................... 34
H11.2203 Glass Retaining Frames (Structural Silicone Glazing System) ....................................................................................... 34
H11.2204 Glass Retaining Frames with Dry Pressure Glazing System ........................................................................................... 35

rooflight system.
8/06/07
H11.2205 Stainless Steel Framing............................................................................................................................................................. 36

H11.2206 Solid Insulated Aluminium Faced Panels .............................................................................................................................. 36
H11.2207 Solid Insulated Bronze Faced Panels .................................................................................................................................... 36
H11.2208 Glass-To-Glass Corners........................................................................................................................................................... 36
Joints............................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
H11.2209 Movement Joints .......................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Windows ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 37
H11.2210 Opening Windows...................................................................................................................................................................... 37
Doors .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 38
H11.2211 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
H11.2212 Bronze Doors................................................................................................................................................................................ 39
H11.2214 Framed Glazed Doors ................................................................................................................................................................ 39
H11.2215 Ironmongery .................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
H11.2216 Systems Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
H11.2217 Inclined Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 40
GRC................................................................................................................................................................................................ 40
H11.2218 GRC Panels and screens to cladding system Generally.................................................................................................. 40
H11.2119 Copings Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Flashings........................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
H11.2220 Flashings........................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
Fixings............................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
H11.2221 Fixings Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................. 42
H11.2222 Fixing Directly to Concrete Structure..................................................................................................................................... 43
Sealants and Gaskets ................................................................................................................................................................ 43
H11.2223 Sealants ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
H11.2224 Gaskets.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Miscellaneous Materials............................................................................................................................................................. 44
H11.2225 H11.2225 Metal Studwork....................................................................................................................................................... 44
H11.2225 Breather Membrane .................................................................................................................................................................... 44
H11.2225 Vapour Barrier .............................................................................................................................................................................. 44
H11.2224 Damp-proof Membrane ............................................................................................................................................................. 44
H11.2225 Insulation........................................................................................................................................................................................ 44
H11.2225 Standard Plasterboard............................................................................................................................................................... 45
H11.2225 Moisture Resistant Plasterboard ............................................................................................................................................. 45
H11.2225 Impact Resistant Plasterboard................................................................................................................................................. 45
H11.2225 Foilbacked Plasterboard............................................................................................................................................................ 45
H11.2225 Fire Resistant Plasterboard ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
H11.2225 External Grade Board................................................................................................................................................................. 45
Cladding Support Structure..................................................................................................................................................... 45
H11.2226 Supports – All Architectural Steelwork ................................................................................................................................. 45
Timber............................................................................................................................................................................................. 45
H11.2227 Timber Generally ......................................................................................................................................................................... 45
H11.2228 Stress Grading of Timber.......................................................................................................................................................... 46
H11.2300 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................46

H11.2301 Fabrication of Walling Systems............................................................................................................................................... 46
H11.2302 Structural Glazing........................................................................................................................................................................ 47
H11.2303 Tolerances for Manufacture and Element Fabrication ....................................................................................................... 47
H11.2304 Welding Procedures................................................................................................................................................................... 47
H11.2305 Tolerances for Manufacture ...................................................................................................................................................... 47
H11.2306 Tolerances for Component Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 47
H11.2307 Tolerances for Manufacture of GRC Panels ........................................................................................................................ 48
H11.2308 Manufacture for GRC................................................................................................................................................................. 48
H11.2309 Timber Generally ......................................................................................................................................................................... 48
H11.2400 FINISHES ..........................................................................................................................48

H11.2401 Colours........................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
H11.2500 ANCILLARIES ..................................................................................................................49

Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding ............................................................................................................................... 49
H11.2501 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Fixing Brackets for Blinds ......................................................................................................................................................... 49
H11.2502 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Cradle Restraints......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
H11.2503 Cradle Restraint Sockets .......................................................................................................................................................... 49
H11.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................49
H11.3100 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................49

H11.3101 Generally........................................................................................................................................................................................ 49

rooflight system.
8/06/07
H11.3102 Blinds Generally........................................................................................................................................................................... 50

H11.3103 Quality of GRC Finishes............................................................................................................................................................ 50
H11.3104 Timber Workmanship Generally .............................................................................................................................................. 50
H11.3200 TOLERANCES .................................................................................................................51

H11.3201 Installation...................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
H11.3202 Site Erection ................................................................................................................................................................................. 52

rooflight system.
8/06/07
H11 ROOF AND WALL SYSTEMS

To be read in conjunction with Section A and other related sections of the Specification, Preliminaries
and Contract Conditions.
H11.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
H11.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

H11.1101 Descriptive Works
a) For design and general performance requirements, refer to Section A of the Specification.
sections.
b) Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the works whilst
Specification.
c) Where no material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable
d) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such
H11.1102 Scope of Works
a) Framing systems.
b) Stick built curtain wall systems.
c) Unitised glazed curtain wall systems.
d) Structural silicone bonded curtain wall systems.
e) Open pattern screens.
f) Shopfront glazing systems.
g) Roofglazing systems.
h) Internal glazing systems.
i) Integrated shading elements.
j) Integrated grilles, louvres and spandrel panels.
k) Integrated opening lights, glazed pivoting/ hinged and sliding doors including all ironmongery.
H11.1103 Interfaces
manufacture.
H11.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

Souk External Wall Cladding Systems
H11.1201 Type EWS-01 Cladding System

a) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising exposed fabricated stainless steel profiles to full height mullions at skirting level with
concealed fixings/bracketry. Above the skirting level of the full height mullions (8.4m high) to
have precast concrete capping profiles to either side and clad on front and back with GRC to

rooflight system.
8/06/07
match the finish of the precast concrete mullion capping as indicated on the design drawings.
Intermediate mullions between the full height mullions which are suspended above the ground
level are to have aluminium cladding on the corridor side with the front face (external side) of
the mullion capped with a precast concrete profile capping reinforced with stainless steel with
aluminium end caps to the base as indicated on the Design Drawings. Screens to be
manufactured from GRC panels with the required patterns as shown on the design drawings:
b) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings.
c) Finishes:
i) Stainless steel framing/profiles to have shot peened or brushed finish.
ii) All aluminium to be colour anodised. Colours to be confirmed.
iii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or to be suitably corrosion protected.
iv) GRC to be self coloured and finished as specified to accepted samples. Colour to be
confirmed.
v) Precast concrete capping profiles to mullions to be self coloured and finished as
specified to accepted samples. Colour to be confirmed. Refer to section E50 for precast
concrete.
d) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
e) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
f) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as indicated on design drawings
g) There shall be a sufficient expansion joint between the precast concrete caps and the GRC to
the front and back of the mullion including a suitable sealant. Refer to section Z22 for sealants.

a) Aluminium curtain wall with integrated double glazed units. The system to be faced with
integrated open screen cladding similar to EWS-01 and precast concrete capping profiles to
mullions. The system to comprise:
i) Extruded aluminium framing (steel core and brackets as required) to profiles as shown on
the Design Drawings to support double glazing incorporating gaskets, sealants etc as
required.
ii) Precast concrete capping profiles to mullions to be self coloured and finished as
specified to accepted samples. Colour to be confirmed. Refer to section E50 for precast
concrete.
iii) Double glazing type GL-01.
b) Windows to be electronically openable (30%) for ventilation. The windows shall also have
provision to be key operated to allow them to be fully openable for cleaning/maintenance
purpose and shall be connected to the ‘Building Maintenance System’ (BMS). Windows at
finished floor level are to be electronically openable/closable for ventilation only and connected
to the BMS, but are not to exceed the back line of the mullion or 100mm whichever is the
lesser. Automatically openable/closable windows shall include anti-trap safety measures to
prevent injury in the event that windows close automatically and trap body parts. Provide all
opening actuators, ironmongery, flashings, drips, seals and associated gaskets, fixings and
bracketry as required to complete the installation.
c) All necessary wiring to be concealed.
d) Double glazing to be suited to SSG bonding with black spacers between glass panes.
e) Provide thermal break as shown on the Design Drawings.
f) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising mullions which are to be capped with precast concrete capping profiles reinforced
with stainless steel as indicated on the design drawings, with concealed fixings/bracketry..
Screens to be manufactured from GRC panels with the required patterns as shown on the
design drawings. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete.
g) The system to incorporate insulated spandrel panels within ceiling services void as shown on
the Design Drawings comprising aluminium faced composite panels integrated into the curtain
walling system.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
h) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings as specified. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete. Provide insulation, fire
separation and seals behind to seal junctions with floor slabs as shown on the Design Drawings
including provision for expansion and all bracketry, fixings and closure pieces as required.
i) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising solid fabricated stainless steel profiles with concealed fixings/bracketry.
j) Finishes:
i) All aluminium to be colour anodised externally and PVDF coated internally. Anodising and
RAL colours to be confirmed.
ii) GRC to be self coloured with smooth finished to accepted samples. Colour to be
confirmed.
iii) Refer to section E50 for finish to precast concrete mullion cappings.
k) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
l) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
m) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as indicated on design drawings.

a) Cladding system comprising of a solid insulated backing wall system, as specified, with
concealed support framing, fixings/bracketry and with integrated screen cladding similar to
EWS-01. To be fixed into wind post/mullion set into solid wall construction. Provide extruded
aluminium capping piece internally and precast concrete capping profiles reinforced with
stainless steel externally to wind post/mullion, as indicated on the design drawings and in
accordance with the structural engineers documentation. Insulated backing wall system to
include non-combustible insulation within cavity, anodised aluminium panel, all framing
components, bracing, head and base channels, bracketry and fixings, EPDM vapour barrier,
insulation, sealants and packing to ensure a rigid, airtight and watertight installation. Internal
face of system to have double layer of plasterboard.
b) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising solid fabricated stainless steel profiles with concealed fixings/bracketry. Screens to
be manufactured from GRC panels with the required patterns as shown on the Design
Drawings:
c) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete. Provide insulation, fire separation and
seals behind to seal junctions with floor slabs as shown on the Design Drawings including
provision for expansion and all bracketry, fixings and closure pieces as required.
d) Where required, as shown on the Design Drawings, the system is required to comprise screen
cladding similar to EWS-01 but facing blockwork construction. Where this ocurs, the GRC
panels are required to be fixed to wind posts set within the block wall. Refer to the Design
Drawings for details of wind post requirements.
e) Finishes:
i) All aluminium to be colour anodised externally and PVDF painted internally. Anodising and
RAL colours to be confirmed.
f) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
g) Backing wall system to incorporate concealed metal stud/framework and be lined either side
with breather water/vapour layer as one membrane to outer face (ie behind the screen).
h) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
i) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as shown on design drawings.
j) Refer to section E50 for precast concrete.

a) Metal framed cladding system with integrated double glazing and a cast aluminium panel. The
system to comprise:
i) Glass retaining framing: Aluminium and steel, thermally broken frames forming support for
glazing.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Glazing: Double glazing (type GL-01) to form shapes as shown on the Design Drawings.
iii) Metal panels: cast aluminium panel with bronze coloured finish to suit required shape as
shown on the design drawings
iv) Coloured Glazing: Coloured drawn glass in shapes as shown on the drawings
b) The panelled system to be integrated into a sub-framing system to match framing system to
EWS-01A as shown on the Design Drawings. Sub-framing to comprise of extruded
aluminium/steel profiles with concealed fixings/bracketry.
c) Finishes:
i) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated.
Glass colours, RAL colours and anodising colours to be confirmed.
ii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or suitably corrosion protected.

As type EWS-01 but with timber mullions and screens as in IWS-01. Timber to be suitable for local
external conditions.
H11.1207 Type EWS-07 Walling System

External walling system with aluminium and timber framed double glazing as type EWS-02 except:
a) Main framing supporting double glazing to be solid hardwood and stainless steel composite as
type IWS-01 with an aluminium/timber composite transom.
b) Hardwood species to be confirmed. Hardwood species shall be suitable for local external
conditions.
c) Open screen system with various patterns as screens to IWS-01.
d) Double glazing type to be GL-01
e) Windows to be electronically openable (30%) for ventilation. The windows shall also have
provision to be key operated to allow them to be fully openable for cleaning/maintenance
purpose and shall be connected to the ‘Building Maintenance System’ (BMS). Windows at
finished floor level are to be electronically openable/closable for ventilation only and connected
to the BMS, but are not to exceed the back line of the mullion or 100mm whichever is the
lesser. Automatically openable/closable windows shall include anti-trap safety measures to
prevent injury in the event that windows close automatically and trap body parts. Provide all
opening actuators, ironmongery, flashings, drips, seals and associated gaskets, fixings and
bracketry as required to complete the installation.
f) All necessary wiring to be concealed.
g) Finishes:
i) Timber main framing and screens to be as type IWS-01.
ii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or suitably corrosion protected.
iii) Aluminium to be colour anodised.
h) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.

As type EWS-03 but with timber/steel composite mullion and timber screen with timber panel behind
as shown on the design drawings.
Types of timber species to be confirmed. To be suitably treated as required for external use to suit the
local conditions.
H11.1209 Type EWS-18 Temporary Cladding system.

Temporary insulated aluminium cladding panels to façade that will connect to Khalifa Bridge.
a) Insulated aluminium cladding panels with plasterboard lining with vapour barrier.
b) Aluminium to be colour anodised. Colour to be confirmed by CA
c) To include metalwork framing, braces, bracketry, fixings, head and base channels. To be
suitable corrosion protected.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
d) Panels are to be airtight and watertight as shown on the design drawings.

Roofglazing Systems
H11.1240 Type RFL-01 Roofglazing System

a) Roof glazing system comprising monopitch double glazing (falling diagonally) fixed to a
panellised shading system with integral insulated guttering incorporating a solid insulated kerb
to 4 sides as shown on the Design Drawings. The rooflight units shall be spanning between and
fixed to the primary structure. Refer to the Structural Engineer's Drawings and Specification for
requirements for the primary structure.
b) Double glazing to be structural sealant (SSG) bonded to the base aluminium framing.
c) The aluminium framing to comprise thermally broken frames for SSG bonding of glass units
(with carrier frames as required to suit unitising).
d) Double glazing to comprise safety glass Type GL-10 as specified.
e) Panels to comprise either fixed panels or opening panels as required (40% openable). Opening
vents to be vertical push up type and be electrically operated and connected to the B.M.S.
Provide all opening actuators, ironmongery, flashings, drips, seals and associated gaskets,
fixings and bracketry as required to complete the installation.
f) Opening mechanism to be automatically deployed in response to surface solar gains in excess
of threshold value.
g) All necessary wiring to be concealed.
h) The system to include integral solar shading (SHD-01) as follows and as specified below:
i) Open grid unitized panels comprising extruded aluminium profiles as shown on the
Design drawings. Aluminium to be PVDF painted. Colour to be confirmed by CA.
ii) The solar shading to form a part of the unitised panels.
iii) Panels to incorporate stainless steel guttering profiles as shown on the Design Drawings.
i) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated. Non-
visible framing to be suitably corrosion protected.
j) The roof glazing system is required to interface with the façade/cleaning system. Refer to the
façade/access maintenance and equipment works package. Provide any bracketry, fixings,
cleats, channels etc, and all interfaces as required.

As type RFL-01 but with /coloured glass (type GL-11) and without shading device.
i) Contractor to be responsible for ‘street roof’ support structure and gutter support
structure as shown on the design drawings.
H11.1242 Type RFL-03A Roofglazing System

Double glazed (curved profile) rooflights set into vaulted roof system, refer to section L10:
H11.1243 Type RFL-03C Roofglazing System

Coloured glass lens set into vaulted roof system, refer to section L10:

a) Inclined roof glazing system fixed to the support structure which is spanning between and fixed
to the primary structure. Refer to the Structural Engineer's Drawings and Specification for
requirements for the primary structure.
b) The rooflight panels to comprise thermally broken aluminium frames supporting glazing with
aluminium cappings or with flush SSG bonding to frames as shown on the Design Drawings.
c) The rooflight system to be double glazed with clear safety glass Type GL-10 as specified with
reinforced, insulated colour anodised aluminium panels and opaque glass at perimeter
conditions.
d) Panels to comprise fixed panels.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
e) The system to include solar shading (SHD-04) as follows:

i) Retractable fabric blinds as specified.
ii) Fabric blinds to be electronically operated as specified and linked to B.M.S.
f) Panels to integrate with stainless steel guttering profiles and drainage outlets as shown on the
Design Drawings. Interface with M&E specification for drainage requirements.
g) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
h) The roof glazing system is required to interface with the façade/cleaning gantry system. Refer to
the façade/access maintenance and equipment works package. Provide any bracketry, fixings,
cleats, channels etc, and all interfaces as required.
Internal Walling Systems
H11.1261 Type IWS-01 Internal Walling System

a) Main framing to comprise composite solid hardwood and factory painted mild steel to profiles
shown on the Design Drawings. Refer to section G10 for finishes to steel. Framing to be fixed
to the primary structure as shown on the Design Drawings.
b) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to main framing with
concealed fixings/bracketry. Screens to be formed from hardwood jointed to form the various
screen patterns.
c) Provide hardwood handrail to profile shown on the Design Drawings. Handrail to have clear
durable lacquer/stain finish.
d) Finishes:
i) Timber to have natural finish.
ii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or suitably to be corrosion protected.
e) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
f) Alternative cost option: Hardwood veneer panel on solid MRMDF core with engraving as shown
on the design drawings.

Internal walling system with screens and backing wall system as type EWS-03, but with timber/steel
composite mullion and timber screen with timber panel behind as shown on the design drawings. or
screen as type EWS-03 with blockwork substrate, except:
a) Main framing supporting backing wall to be solid hardwood as type IWS-01.
b) Open/solid screen system with various patterns as screens to IWS-01.
c) Alternative cost option: Hardwood veneer panel on solid MRMDF core with engraving as shown
on the design drawings.
d) Finishes:
i) Timber main framing and screens to be as type IWS-01.
ii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or suitably to be corrosion protected.
e) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
f) The system is required to form an internal walling system and is not required to be weathertight.

Bronzed anodised aluminium framed internal walling system with bronze extrusion handrail and cast
aluminium infill panels. System to comprise as follows:
i) Metal panels: cast aluminium panel with bronze coloured PVDF painted finish to suit
required shape as shown on the design drawings.
ii) The system is required to form an internal walling/balustrade type system and is not
required to be weathertight.
iii) Pattern variations to be as shown on the design drawings.

rooflight system.
8/06/07

Double glazed internal walling system to vertical circulation void at basement as follows:
a) Laminated safety glass as type GL-01 with a sheet of textured, coloured drawn glass.
b) System to include extruded aluminium glass retaining frame and mullions.
c) Aluminium to be colour anodised – colour to be confirmed by CA.
d) Non-visible metalwork to be stainless steel grade 1440.1 or suitable corrosion protected mild
steel.
e) Allow for colour anodised aluminium linear air grille to be integrated as shown on the design
drawings.
f) Back painted glass panel as shown on the design drawings.
g) Insulated aluminium extrusion spandrel which will be colour anodised. Colour to confirmed by
CA.
h) Make provision for electronically operable panel as indicated on design drawings.
Shading Devices
H11.1271 Type SHD-01 Shading Device

a) Extruded aluminium gridded shading device forming a part of unitised panels as specified
above. Finish to be PVDF painted. Colour to be confirmed by CA.
b) Shading panels to be hinged or demountable for access to glazing.

a) Aluminium shading system forming a sliding screen system of insulated aluminium profiles as
shown on the Design Drawings.
b) The shading system to be electronically operated as specified and linked into the BMS for
automatic operation.
c) Provide supports/bracketry as required and as shown on the Design Drawings.
d) To be fixed to the primary structure as indicated on the structural engineers drawings.

Retractable motorised fabric blinds as specified and associated with roof glazing system RFL-04.
Glass Doors
H11.1281 Type EDR-01 Bronze Doors
Bronze framed doors with extruded bronze framing and bronze solid panels with engraving as shown
on the design drawings (refer to section Z11 for bronze engraving and general metalwork), with
pivoting or hinged manual operation. Door system to include door leaves and frames and all
ironmongery/operating mechanisms, and shall be integrated in the adjacent walling type.
H11.1282 Type EDR-02 Bronze Doors

Bronze framed doors with extruded bronze framing, double glazing with pivoting or hinged operation.
Door system to include door leaves and frames and all ironmongery/operating mechanisms, and shall
be integrated in the adjacent walling type. Door to be power operated or fully automatic in
accordance with BS 7036 Part 5.
H11.1284 Type EDR-04 Aluminium Doors

Aluminium framed doors with extruded aluminium framing, double glazing with pivoting or hinged
operation. Door system to include door leaves and frames and all ironmongery/operating
mechanisms, and shall be integrated in the adjacent walling type. Door to be power operated or fully
automatic in accordance with BS 7036 Part 5.
H11.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
H11.1301 Tender Response

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) Provide Tender submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section A.4000 of the
Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Pre-contract Design proposals including comprehensive technical specifications of the
Contractor's Proposals.
ii) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers where different from those specified.
iii) Method statements for installation for all cladding types.
iv) Predicted service life data.
v) Specification/ Technical details of glass proposed including surface modified glass data,
colour rendering indices, etc. as specified.
vi) Details of proposals for glass door mechanisms.
vii) Outline risk assessment statement for all glazing systems.
viii) Samples where specified.
ix) List of Tests included.
x) QA/QC programme.
xi) List of proposed Working Drawings.
xii) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
xiii) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc.
xiv) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
H11.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Provide 4 pre-contract samples of each of the following in accordance with Section A.4000,
including trade literature and technical specifications:
a) 300mm length of stainless steel framing with proposed finish (both wall and door framing).
b) 300mm length of composite timber and stainless steel framing with proposed finish (both wall
and door framing).
c) 500mm x 500mm cruciform sample panel of glazed curtain walling type EWS-02 including
extruded aluminium mullion and transom and double glazing set into framing with gaskets with
proposed finish.
d) 300mm x 300mm x 50mm block sample of timber for timber screens.
e) Samples of bronze panels with prepatinated finish and steel with brass coating 300mm x
300mm.
f) 4 sets of samples in 3 different colours (ie 12 samples in total) of GRC comprising 300mm x
300mm block samples with proposed finish.
g) 300mm x 300mm sample of aluminium sheet cladding.
h) 300mm sample of timber balustrade.
i) 300mm x 300mm sample of solar shading device with fabric.
j) All proposed gasket types, extrusions, etc. including at least one joint.
k) Operating mechanisms for roof openings.
l) Glass samples 300mm x 300mm of all proposed glass types.
m) Proposed types of finish.
n) Ironmongery.
o) Switches and controls.
p) 300mm length of hardwood to be used. (Nyatoh or acceptable equivalent)
rooflight system.
8/06/07
H11.1303 Post Contract Samples

Provide 4 post contract samples of each of the following in accordance with Section A.4000:
a) 500mm length of stainless steel framing with proposed finish (both wall and door framing).
b) 500mm length of composite timber and stainless steel framing with proposed finish (both wall
and door framing).
c) 500mm x 500mm cruciform sample panel of all glazed curtain walling type EWS-02 including
extruded aluminium mullion and transom and double glazing set into framing with gaskets with
proposed finish.
d) Samples of bronze panels with prepatinated finish 500mm x 500mm.
e) 3 full size samples of GRC screen panel with each type of open pattern in 3 different colours
with proposed finish.
f) 500mm x 500mm samples of timber screens (each type of pattern) with proposed finish.
g) 500mm x 500mm sample of aluminium sheet cladding.
h) 500mm sample of timber balustrade.
i) 300mm x 300mm sample of solar shading device with fabric.
j) Metal louvres of all types.
k) 500mm length of timber and track used for shading device screen.
l) All proposed gasket types, extrusions, etc. including at least one joint.
m) All colour types samples 300mm x 300mm minimum size.
n) Operating mechanisms for roof openings.
o) Sliding operating mechanisms, track and wheels.
p) Switches and controls.
q) Glass samples 500mm x 500mm of all specified glass types.
r) Various extrusions at least 300mm in length.
s) Various bolts and exposed fixings.
t) Various ironmongery including hinges, budget locks and window and door handles.
u) Samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
v) 300mm length of hardwood to be used. (Nyatoh or acceptable equivalent)
w) Samples of engraving. To show quality and finish of final engraving standard for acceptance by
the CA.
H11.1304 Mock-up Requirements

Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
Refer to the Mock-up Drawings.
H11.1305 Prototype Requirements

Provide prototypes in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
a) Prototypes for project specific testing as follows:
i) Provide wall systems prototype. 2 structural bays 5.6mx10.5m high including stack joint.
Refer to architectural drawings for location.
ii) Provide roof systems prototype. 2 structural bays approximately 5600mmx3500mm
including integral gutter which runs in between bays and at sides.
b) A purpose made rig will be required for testing purposes as necessary. For details of required
prototype test scope, refer to the Tender Drawings. Details of test including testing rig to be
submitted for review by the Architect.
H11.1306 Benchmark Requirements

Provide quality benchmarks in accordance with Section A.4000:

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location to be agreed.
Testing
H11.1307 Previous/ Comparative Testing Certification

a) The Contractor may provide certification to demonstrate that the cladding works have been
previously tested to meet the criteria specified.
b) Where previous testing data is not representative of the project specific requirements or is not
deemed to be satisfactory by the Architect, laboratory tests shall be carried out to satisfy the
c) Test certificates do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the performance
and service life requirements of the cladding works.
H11.1308 Testing of Prototypes

a) Supporting Frames: The prototypes shall be mounted in test rigs which have the same
conditions of attachment and support as elements of the works, with a supporting structure
similar in stiffness to that supporting the works. The prototypes to be tested shall not be
influenced by the test chamber.
b) Provide details of all jointing, sealing and glazing techniques, materials used, type, number and
size of drainage/ventilation apertures and section properties of the framing members.
c) The Architect shall be given at least 7 days notice prior to the erection and dismantling of the
prototype construction, as the Architect may elect to observe the assembly and dismantling of
the test prototypes.
d) Tests shall not be carried out without prior notice of at least 7 days being given to the Architect.
e) Prior to testing, sufficient time shall be allowed to permit all chemically curing sealants to
achieve their proper cure as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
f) Before the test is begun, the external face of the specimen shall be thoroughly washed using a
mild additive-free detergent and then rinsed.
g) Testing shall be carried out by an independent laboratory acceptable to the Architect.
h) The prototypes shall be tested for air permeability, water leakage, and wind load resistance,
plus additional structural loading tests as necessary to demonstrate through
calculations/drawings that the works are capable of accommodating the building movements
without degrading the performance of the works.
i) Details of the testing procedures shall be provided to the Architect for review and comment.
H11.1309 Standard Test Apparatus and Calibration

Submit details of the following equipment intended for use in the testing process:
a) Test chamber.
b) Air system.
c) Water spray system.
d) Pressure measuring apparatus.
e) Airflow-metering system.
f) Water flow-metering system.
g) Deflection measuring devices.
h) Calibration.
i) Seismic test.
H11.1310 Air Permeability Tests

a) The prototypes shall be tested to determine the air infiltration per unit area for fixed panels, and
per unit joint length for any opening lights. A check for regions of concentrated air leakage shall
be made after the air permeability test has been completed and such areas marked upon the
prototype drawings.
b) Testing shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 12153, for cladding, and BS EN 1026,
for windows and doors, to a test pressure class of 600 Pa as defined in BS 6375 and the
rooflight system.
8/06/07
requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.

c) In addition, an air ex-filtration test shall be carried out on the prototype to check the
performance in relation to the whole building's air leakage test requirements, in accordance with
the requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes and to meet the
criteria required by Local Building Regulations.
H11.1311 Façade Floor Air Leakage Testing. (To be confirmed by CA)

a) The joint between the façade cladding and the structural slab at each floor level shall be sealed
such that air shall leak through the façade floor joint at no more than 0.1 litres/sec. per linear
metre of façade at 50N/m².
b) The façade floor joint air leakage testing shall be carried out on Site by a specialist laboratory
such as CERAM, Taywood or BSRIA.
c) Allow for the testing of up to 10 sections of façade, each section comprising the building
module of façade. The test sections shall be selected by the Architect. If the test fails, locate
the leak, seal it and retest the section until the test is passed. If more than two tests fail, a
further 10 sections of façade shall be re-tested.
H11.1312 Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests

a) Tests shall be carried out adopting both the static and the dynamic procedures set out below:
i) Static Test Method carried out in accordance with BS EN 12155, for cladding, BS EN
1027, for windows and doors, and the requirements of the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes for the static test method.
ii) Dynamic Test Method carried out in accordance with the requirements of the CWCT
Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes or equivalent European Standard ENV
13050, for testing for water penetration using the dynamics method.
iii) Resistance to water penetration when tested shall be in the test pressure class 600 Pa or
0.25 the design wind pressure, whichever is the greater, in accordance with the
requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes for testing for
water penetration by the static and dynamic test method.
b) Performance under Testing:
i) There shall be no leakage into the internal face of the works at any time during the test or
within 15 minutes of completion of the test.
ii) At the completion of the test there shall be no standing water in locations intended to
drain.
H11.1313 Wind Resistance Tests

a) A serviceability test shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 12179, for cladding, and BS
EN 12211, for windows and doors, as modified by the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes.
b) A safety test shall be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes.
c) Test pressure: The peak test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design wind pressure for the
‘Safety’ test, and 1.0 times the design wind pressure for the ‘Serviceability’ test.
d) Performance under Testing:
i) At both positive and negative applications of the peak test pressure, there shall be no
permanent damage to framing members, glass or glazing panels or anchors. Framing
members shall not buckle, panels shall remain securely held, glass and glazing shall not
be damaged and gaskets shall not be displaced. The glass itself shall not deflect such
that edge cover is insufficient to restrain the glass under peak test pressure or such that
spacers become visible.
ii) After loading to the positive and negative peak test pressure, permanent deformation to
wall framing members shall not exceed 1/500 of the span measured between points of
attachment to the building one hour after the loading has been removed.
iii) Refer to clause H11.1403 for maximum allowable deflections for glass retaining framing
sections. The glass itself shall not deflect such that edge cover is insufficient to restrain
the glass under peak test pressure or such that spacers become visible.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iv) The loads created by specified test conditions shall be accommodated safely, without
detriment to the overall design, structural integrity and performance of the works.
v) The permanent fixings of any component shall be capable of resisting the combined dead
load and maximum wind load with the required factor of safety in accordance with the
CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes and as appropriate to the relevant
materials used.
e) Tests shall also verify:
i) That all components shall return to their original positions under zero load, providing that
the elastic limit to the materials has not been exceeded.
ii) That in all cases, the deflection of members shall not exceed specified tolerances.
iii) That anchorage shall not show permanent signs of slackening off. The deflection of these
members shall not be sufficient to damage non-loadbearing member of the inner wall
assembly.
iv) That no noise shall occur due to movement of components.
H11.1314 Impact Testing

A soft body impact test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8200, conforming to category B
requirements (See table 2).
H11.1315 Off-Site Test Sequence

a) The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
b) Test Sequence:
i) Preliminary testing: Prior to the full test sequence, the prototypes shall be pre-tested
under static pressure at 50% maximum design wind load, followed by water penetration
test at 50% of the pressure specified for final tests. Deficiencies observed in the samples
during testing shall be recorded, and appropriate corrections made.
ii) The testing sequence shall be followed in accordance with the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes Sequence B procedures.
iii) Further tests shall be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes Discretionary Test procedures as necessary.
c) No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the Testing Authority.
d) If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken as detailed in
the relevant CWCT procedures. However, If any modification is undertaken that, in the opinion
of the independent testing authority or witness, invalidates earlier test results, the sequence
shall commence again at the first test. This requirement is not applicable to glass breakage
during the wind resistance safety test when replacement of a pane of glass may be carried out
without re-starting the whole sequence.
H11.1316 Acoustic Testing – Initial Advance Test

a) Identify the glass configurations and incorporate any acoustically enhanced configurations that
may be necessary to meet the Specification.
b) Immediately following the appointment of the curtain walling sub-contractor, arrange laboratory
acoustic tests of the proposed glass configurations using similar framing to that intended with
similar dimensions and mass per metre run of framing. These prototypes will not be used as
visual samples and will not include glass coatings or heat treatments, but are to be used to
confirm compliance with the specified acoustic data.
c) From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each cladding
type for review.
H11.1317 Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance

a) General:
i) Comply with the requirements of the Specification with respect to the testing of the
structural silicone application.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Provide the Architect with documentary evidence that the selection of sealant takes into
account any relevant recommendations by the sealant manufacturer as to the use of the
sealant.
iii) Compatibility: Submit to the Architect test certificates to confirm compatibility of the
sealant used with all substrate materials including aluminium, finishes, glass, glass
coatings, gaskets, setting blocks, backing rods, etc. These certificates shall relate to tests
carried out by the sealant manufacturer.
b) Submit to the Architect adhesion test data of production samples as tested in accordance with
ASTM C 794. These shall establish adhesion performance over the temperatures specified in
the Specification.
i) Where the structural silicone bonds glass to the cladding framework, the weakest
element in the line of stress shall have a minimum strength of 600kPa or 6 times the
design strength, whichever is the greater in accordance with ETAG 01/015 or ETAG 002
documents which set out the requirements for use of structural silicone. This criterion
shall be proven with a statistical confidence of 99%. For each combination of substrate
and design conditions, provide a report from the sealant manufacturer for the tests
performed in the following manner:
ii) Assemble and fully cure under production conditions (not laboratory conditions) a
minimum of 12 samples. Each sample shall be a minimum of 150mm long. The sample
shall be made of actual substrate material, i.e. glass with actual coating (low E and/or
fritting), aluminium sections with finishes, etc. The joint geometry shall be accepted by the
Architect.
• Double-sided tape or other spacer material shall be installed such that it does not
add to the silicone joint strength.
• Weather seals shall not be installed on the samples.
• After full cure the samples shall be totally immersed in tap water at room
temperature for 7 days.
• Samples shall be tested in a tensometer 25 hours after removal from the water
immersion tank.
• Each sample shall be subjected to a tensile load test. The crosshead speed shall be
50mm per minute. Continue testing until failure occurs or until 830kPa or 6 times
the design load, whichever is the greater, is applied to the samples. Report the
maximum stress and mode of failure including percentage area of cohesive failure
and any area of voids in the sealant for each sample. Adhesive failure area or void
cross section area parallel to the substrate face greater than 20% is unacceptable.
• A statistical analysis of results shall indicate a design stress of not less than 600kPa
or 6 times the design stress of the sealant, whichever is the greater, with a
confidence of 99% over the temperature range as described in the Specification.
• If the sample set does not meet the requirements of the above criteria, the design of
the failed element shall be revised and subjected to a re-test. This procedure shall
continue until the above requirements have been met.
• Prepare a report of the above testing. No fabrication shall commence until the
results have been accepted by the Architect.
• Retain all test results with regard to the structural silicone glazing for a minimum
period of 15 years from project completion. These shall be made available to the
Architect on request.
c) Maintenance:
i) Recommend a periodic maintenance regime for acceptance by the Architect. This shall be
incorporated into the O&M manual. Recommendations shall include:
• Cleaning: Specify acceptable detergents, etc. and methods to be used.
• Details and frequency of close visual inspection requirements, including materials to
be employed.
• Inspection: Provide forms to be filled out periodically, each pre-dated with the
inspection date and an adequate quantity for the design life of the building. The
form shall state the full procedure for the inspection.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
• Recommendations for periodic cut-out of structural seals and weather seals (if
appropriate) to check shore hardness and tensile properties of the seal.
ii) Each of the properties shall clearly state pass/fail criteria and indicate action required
when a failure is obtained as a result.
H11.1318 Site Hose Testing

A Site water hose test shall be carried out in accordance with the recommendations of the CWCT
Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes. Minimum area to be tested shall be 5%.
H11.1319 Testing of Fixings

As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and witnessed by the
Structural Engineer. All in accordance with BS 8080.
H11.1320 Thermal Cycling Tests

Not required.
H11.1321 Building Movements/Racking Procedure Tests

a) Carry out building movements/racking tests as follows:
i) Position – double floor height prototypes with racking applied to central floor.
ii) Number of cycles: 5 cycles in each direction.
iii) Magnitude: Refer to the Structural Engineer’s Specification in respect of seismic
requirements (Note seismic zone ** applies).
b) Following the building movement procedure carry out air permeability tests and static water
tests in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes as referred to
in earlier testing clauses.
H11.1322 Discretionary Tests - Screen Cladding – Noise and Vibration

a) Undertake tests and demonstrate to the acceptance of the Architect with regard to the
following aspects of the design of the screen cladding:
i) The works shall not vibrate so as to cause noticeable noise or vibration including
transmission to other elements of the cladding or into the building frame.
ii) The flow of wind over the works shall not cause significantly audible noise effects from
wind flow, including transmission to other elements of the cladding or into the building
frame.
iii) Specialist advice should be sought to support the Contractor’s Proposals.
b) Three principal areas of the screen and associated elements require consideration:
i) General areas.
ii) Areas around windows or other similar openings.
iii) The topmost screen section of the façade.
c) Tests shall include wind tunnel testing at an approved independent laboratory. For noise tests a
suitable test facility shall be used, which enables wind noise from the wind generation system to
be excluded. Mock-ups used shall be full size using elements representative of the final static
and dynamic behaviour and shall be oriented through a range of angles of incidence to the wind
flow to ensure that all wind flow scenarios have been considered. The ‘site reference pressure’
shall be taken as specified.
d) Wind tunnel tests shall be carried out on the building model to assess various effects. The full
report shall be available for inspection, if required.
H11.1323 Fire Tests

a) Where required, carry out fire tests to comply with the fire Strategy Report and the relevant
NFPA Standards, BS or EN in addition to any Abu Dhabi Civil Defence local requirements as
applicable.
b) The impregnation of any fire treatment to hardened softwood, such as acetylated wood and
terminally strengthened wood, should be tested by the supplier to demonstrate that the
absorption capacity has not been reduced too much during their treatment.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) Products tested to meet BS or EN standards may be acceptable subject to acceptance by the

Architect.
d) All tests to be carried out by an accredited testing lab acceptable to the Architect.
H11.1324 Results and Certificates

a) Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
b) Submit certificates relating to the materials used in the work as confirmation of tests carried out
in accordance with the relevant British Standards, and/or other national standards as
appropriate.
c) Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests
performed, material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings, and any other
documentation to substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by
sub-contractors.
d) The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which
they refer and are retrievable.
e) The records shall be available for inspection by the Architect and copies of records shall be
given to the Architect upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be
submitted to the Architect.
H11.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

General
H11.1401 General
a) Comply with the general performance of Section A.5000 and the following specific
performance requirements.
b) The works generally shall be designed, constructed and installed to BS 8200 and the
recommendations of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
c) Inclined overhead glazing shall comply with the requirements of the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes.
Structural Performance
H11.1402 Specific Movements

a) For details of structural movements and tolerances to be accommodated by the façade
systems, refer to the Structural Movements and Tolerances Report and the Structural
Engineer's specification and drawings as applicable and as prepared by the Structural
Engineer.
b) Design façade systems to accommodate the following structural movements:
i) Vertical differential deflection (floor to floor).
ii) Horizontal and vertical differential movement (floor to floor).
iii) Horizontal movement (long term shrinkage).
iv) Column shortening.
v) Building sway.
vi) Seismic sway.
c) Where curtain walling is continuous over more than one floor, provide a horizontal stack joint to
accommodate vertical building movement.
H11.1403 Deflections
a) The allowable deflection of any glazed element of the works, when carrying full design loads,
shall comply with BS 6262 as applicable.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the maximum allowable deflection for any general framing members,
panels, glass components shall be in accordance with the requirements of the CWCT Standard
for Systemised Building Envelopes and all relevant standards as applicable.
c) The allowable deflection of any element of the inclined overhead glazing assemblies, when

rooflight system.
8/06/07
carrying full design loads, shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6262, BS
5516: Parts 1 and 2 and the Centre for Window Cladding Technology (CWCT) Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes as applicable.
d) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the
works or adjacent structural or building elements.
e) All components, couplings and fixings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
f) The works shall accommodate defined differential structural movements arising from any loads
imposed by adjacent structures.
g) The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part
of the works, their support structure or internal finishes.
h) Calculations of deflections for structural aluminium shall recognise criteria contained in BS
8118: Part 1 limiting deflections.
H11.1404 Design Loads

a) The system shall be designed to withstand the loads as specified below without affecting the
system’s ability to meet the specified performance requirements and/or the exceptional loads
specified herein. Unless otherwise stated, the system shall also be designed to comply with all
prevailing relevant British Standards as appropriate, including, but not necessarily limited to BS
6180 and BS 6399.
b) When calculating design loads the worst combination shall be considered, taking account of
the fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design
criterion.
c) Self-weight Gravity Loads: The works shall be capable of accommodating the self-weight of the
system including all of its framing and supporting system.
d) The Glazed Curtain Walling/ Cladding Systems shall be designed so that failure of any one
local element (e.g. bolt, anchor, of fixing component) will not result in progressive failure of the
curtain wall/ cladding.
e) Cast-in Inserts: Design to resist worst load combinations. For proprietary inserts, design to
manufacturers requirements.
H11.1405 Seismic Loads

The system to be designed to withstand the relevant seismic activity to comply with UBC97 – Unified
Building Code-USA-Division III-V. The AAMA-501-4 seismic user class to be operational.
H11.1406 Imposed Gravity Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed by adjacent and/or attached elements
that bear onto, are suspended from or fixed to the system. Ensure that where curtain walling/framing
systems are required to support GRC panels, that the dead load of the GRC is fully accommodated
in the design of the curtain walling/framing system. Refer to the Design Drawings for information on
such elements and/or required load capacities. No elements from other trades shall be fixed to and/or
supported by the curtain wall, unless accurately specified, indicated on the Design Drawings and/or
agreed by the Architect.
H11.1407 Live Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
i) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and cladding support
structure.
ii) Horizontally imposed loads in accordance with BS 6180 and BS 6399: Part 1 for all
relevant conditions and in compliance with Local Building Regulations including
requirements for containment (where balustrade loading is required).
iii) Façade projections to withstand maintenance loads without dislodgement or permanent
deformation.
iv) Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of framing members and glazing arising
from maintenance and cleaning operations. The works shall sustain safely, without
reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to any component, a static

rooflight system.
8/06/07
500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on any part of the
framing.
v) Known impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during its service life, without
deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
vi) Loads imposed during replacement of panels/units.
vii) Wind loads.
viii) Horizontal and vertical loads of similar magnitude to those which are imposed upon
adjacent or attached elements. Refer to the Design Drawings for information on such
elements and/or required load capacities.
ix) Internal sills: Internal sills shall be designed to accommodate a man loading of 1.1kN
without permanent deformation.
b) Inclined glazing shall be capable of accommodating live loads based on BS 5516 without any
reduction in its performance. Refer to Section Z25 for further information.
H11.1408 Imposed Movements

The works shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed upon the system by defined
movements of its supporting structure and/or other adjacent elements.
H11.1409 Wind/Air Pressure Loads

a) The works shall withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of wind loads where
appropriate (e.g. external conditions or internal areas subject to external wind pressure). Refer
to clause A.5305.
b) Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the building,
taking into account the presence of significant openings, which might arise occasionally within
the building enclosure.
c) Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test/Report prepared by others.
d) The loads created by wind loading as specified shall be accommodated safely, without
detriment to the overall design, structural integrity and performance of the works.
e) Make necessary provisions as required to eliminate vibration, noise and metal fatigue caused by
airflow to the screen cladding.
H11.1410 Thermal Movement

a) Allow for local thermal movements exerted due to the psychrometric data specified in Section
A.
b) The works, including all necessary support structure, shall be designed to accommodate
changes in dimension and shape of its components resulting from changes in service
temperatures and from differential surface temperatures between the inside and outside of the
building without any reduction in the specified performance. The design shall cater for all
temporary and permanent conditions envisaged for the works.
c) Surface differential temperature range for components of metal components shall be taken as
0°C to + 80°C.
d) The annual surface temperature ranges for the materials used in the works shall be confirmed
during the Detailed Design period, both for external surface temperatures and internal
temperatures when the building is in normal use and when empty or out of use. Due regard
shall be made to the effects of orientation of the building towards the sun, in particular for
overhead and sloped glazing situations and thermal stress calculations and risk assessments
shall be submitted by the Contractor for review.
H11.1411 Inertial Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/deceleration of moving sections including opening lights, doors and vents of the building
or enclosure.
H11.1412 Exceptional Loads

a) If specifically required by the Architect, the system shall also be designed to withstand
exceptional loads such as, high impact loads (e.g. vehicle impact) and seismic loads
(earthquakes). For such exceptional loads only, the system may be allowed to sustain a degree

rooflight system.
8/06/07
of damage.
i) Impact loads: As specified herein.
ii) Seismic loads: To be confirmed.
H11.1413 Strength of Doors

a) Ensure that the doors, including ironmongery, meet the ‘heavy duty’ category as defined in DD
171 or an equivalent international standard. At the same time doors shall comply with and not
compromise the other stated performance criteria for the works.
b) Provide evidence to demonstrate that the doors, including ironmongery, have been tested to
meet the minimum acceptance criteria given in DD 171 for the following:
i) Slamming shut impact.
ii) Slamming open impact.
iii) Heavy body impact.
iv) Hard body impact.
v) Torsion.
vi) Download deformation.
vii) Closure against obstruction.
viii) Resistance to jarring and vibration.
ix) Abusive forces on door handles.
c) Glass in doors:
i) Comply with BS 6262.
ii) Impact performance to achieve class A (class 1B1) to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600.
d) Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to open fire rated or non-fire rated doors
on disabled access routes are in accordance with the requirements of BS 8300.
Environmental Performance
H11.1414 Moisture Movement

a) The works shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the
specified performance:
i) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
ii) Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by the temperature
extremes expected.
b) Allowance shall be made to control the flow of any water that may collect behind or within the
cladding and for directing this water to the outside, such that no water remains internally.
H11.1415 Thermal Performance Requirements

a) Detail the works to minimise cold bridging in any area of the system. The maximum thermal
permitted transmittance (U-value) for the various areas of the works shall be as follows:
i) U values shall be as specified for the relevant cladding types.
b) The average U-value through the works shall comply with the above requirements and meet all
Statutory requirements as well as Local Building Regulations and the M&E requirements for
heat gain/loss as relevant.
c) Submit thermal calculations for the various components and the average thermal performance
of the proposed works to comply with the specified requirements.
d) Ensure that thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
H11.1416 Solar Performance Requirements

a) General:
i) Data sheets for project specific glass build-ups in accordance with BS EN 410 (light

rooflight system.
8/06/07
transmittance, radiant transmittance of glazing) with tolerances of ±3% for flat glazing,
shall be submitted in respect of solar and visible light performance confirming compliance
with the Specification. Facilities shall be maintained to evaluate and report on expected
solar performance under varying conditions of solar radiation and external/internal air
velocity.
ii) The works shall be designed to ensure that the glazing does not crack or distort or is
damaged in any way through differences of temperature on the surfaces of the glazing.
iii) All specified criteria are nominal values.
b) Confirm the total solar transmission (G-value) for each glass type specified for review by the
Architect. Glass manufacturers and types shall be acceptable to the Architect only if they meet
the performance and visual requirements defined by the Specification.
c) Individual GL Types:
i) Glass Type GL-01 shall be neutral body tint, solar control double glazed, insulated, safety
glass units meeting the following criteria:
• Light transmission factor: Not less than 70%.
• External light reflectance: Not greater than 10%.
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.55.
• Colour rendition index of glass: Not less than 95%.
• U-value: Not greater than 1.8W/m²K.
• High performance coating: No.
• Low E coating: Yes.
• Safety glass requirement: [Inner pane and outer pane].
• Acoustic treatment to meet the requirements of the Acoustic Report.
ii) Glass Type GL-02 shall be coloured (body tinted), double glazed, high performance,
insulated, safety glass units meeting the following criteria:
• Light transmission factor: Not less than [TBC]%.
• External light reflectance: Not greater than [TBC]%.
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.55
• Colour rendition index of glass: Not less than [TBC]%.
• High performance coating: Neutral solar control coating.
iii) Glass Type GL-03 shall be clear/neutral body tinted, double glazed, high performance,
• Colour rendition index of glass: Not less than 95%.
• High performance coating: No

rooflight system.
8/06/07

iv) Glass Type GL-10 shall be neutral body tint, solar control double glazed, insulated, safety
glass units meeting the following criteria:
• Colour rendition index of glass: Not less than [TBC].
• High performance coating: No.
• Low E coating: Yes
v) Glass Type GL-11 shall be coloured (body tinted), double glazed, high performance,
• Light transmission factor: Not less than [TBC]%.
• External light reflectance: Not greater than [TBC]%.
vi) Glass Type GL-12 shall be clear/body tinted, double glazed, domed high performance,
vii) Values indicated are regarded as the minimum the glass must achieve.
viii) All inner panes of the double glazed units are to be safety glass to BS 6206 and BS EN
12600.
H11.1417 Air Permeability/Infiltration

a) The Detailed Design shall minimise airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through
joints/junctions to control concentrated airflow.
b) The works shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage rates, if measured in
accordance with the CWCT Standard, shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) The works shall have a maximum air infiltration rate of:

i) 1.5 m³/hr/m² for fixed lights.
ii) 2.0 m³/hr/per metre length for opening lights/smoke vents.
iii) 3.0m³/hr/per metre length of opening for framed and rebated doors.
d) Items i), ii) above shall be tested at a minimum pressure of 600 Pa when tested generally in
accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
e) Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at any one location.
f) Provide actual air leakage results from tests for acceptance.
g) Where appropriate, analyse details of pressure equalisation proposals for all areas of rainscreen
cladding taking into account variable external pressure gradient for acceptance by the Architect.
H11.1418 Condensation
a) Except under extreme conditions where the relative humidity is in excess of that specified in
clause A.5402, condensation shall not form, either on internal or external surfaces of framing
members, glazing, solid panels or louvres, or interstitially within the construction of infill panels
forming a part of the works, such that it may lead to degradation of performance, damage or
staining under the psychrometric conditions specified.
b) Condensation shall be permitted in non-visible drained and ventilated rebates subject to
condensation not having a deleterious effect on performance or durability.
c) Provide a condensation risk assessment with the Tender return based upon the psychrometric
conditions specified, for review by the Architect.
d) In conditions outside of the ranges given in A.5400, design the system so that the condensate
either:
i) Drains to the outside or;
ii) Sits in a collection point designed for this purpose, which allows the condensate to
evaporate harmlessly.
H11.1419 Capillarity
The Detailed Design, gaskets, seals, etc. shall take into account and eliminate any possibility of water
migration to the inside of the building due to capillarity.
H11.1420 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance

a) The works shall be weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water leakage onto
the internal face of the works and any other part of the system that may be adversely affected.
b) The works, including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building, shall be
weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and
other movements.
c) The Detailed Design of the works shall not be based on a single line of defence. The cavities
between the lines of defence shall be drained and ventilated to the exterior. Wet applied seals
for the purpose of preventing the ingress of water shall not be accepted with the exception of
the structural silicone seals or wet seals used for sealing the works against adjacent interfacing
systems.
d) The Detailed Design and construction of the works shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall
remain rigid and accommodate all specified thermal, building structure or other movements and
any applicable loads without compromising its watertightness. All movement joints shall also be
finally designed and constructed to accommodate such loads or movements without
compromising the glazing's watertightness.
H11.1421 Local Factors

a) Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the
location shall be selected.
b) An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors
likely to have an adverse effect on materials intended for the works. More appropriate materials
shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Acoustic
H11.1422 Acoustic Performance Requirements

a) The works shall effectively insulate the internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.
b) The works shall provide internal sound reduction between floors.
c) The works shall provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same floor.
d) Evidence shall be provided that the acoustic performance requirements given herein can be
achieved.
e) The measured noise exposure of each façade shall have been used in conjunction with the
internal noise criteria of 45dBL Aeq to derive the façade sound insulation requirements of this
development.
f) Refer to the acoustic consultants specification.
g) Each façade/cladding system shall achieve the required sound reduction indices (R) as
specified in the Acoustic Report when tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 140: Part 3
H11.1423 Flanking Transmission

a) Where required, the works shall be tested for flanking transmission with a partition meeting the
façade at a mullion. Refer to the Acoustic Report as relevant. The system shall provide a
weighted standardised flanking level difference of at least DnTf,w 46dB when tested in an
accredited independent laboratory in accordance with BS EN ISO 10848: Part 2.
b) Where required, the works shall be tested for flanking transmission at a junction with the
floor/ceiling slabs. Refer to the Acoustic Report as relevant.
c) Any acoustic tests are to commence at a time agreed with the CA, in a recognised independent
laboratory, with a comprehensive test report being submitted, in writing, to the CA within three
weeks of completion of the tests.
d) Where existing test data is available from a recognised independent laboratory, it shall be
considered acceptable providing the tests have been carried out for the exact system being
offered. Test data for similar constructions may be accepted if supporting computations are
offered to account for any differences between the proposed and tested construction.
Fire
H11.1424 General
a) All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with class B
flame spread characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic
gases. Comply with NFPA 5000, NFPA 251, NFPA 101 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) All materials and products used shall comply with Abu Dhabi Civil Defence local requirements.
c) Provide fire retardant treatment to timber as required by the Fire Strategy Report. Comply with
Section Z12. Treatment to be compatible with timber finish and shall not discolour timber.
H11.1425 Surface Spread of Flame

a) Comply with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) All materials used internally and externally (excluding sealants and gaskets) shall have the
required surface spread of flame classification to comply with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy
Report.
H11.1426 Fire and Smoke Stopping

a) Be responsible for the provision of all cavity barriers in the external wall and for fire stopping, as
required, at the junction of the external wall with all other fire-resisting elements of the structure,
to meet the requirements of the NFPA 5000, the Fire Strategy Report and Local Building
Regulations.
b) Provide fire rated sealing to all junctions with floor slabs and party walls.
c) All fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they shall not
become dislodged in the event of a fire. The fixing shall secure the stop in position for a period
at least equal to that required for the compartment wall or floor against which the works abut.
H11.1427 Fire Resistance

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) If fire resistance is required in the works for space separation purposes, comply with functional
requirement of NFPA, the Fire Strategy Report and the Local Building Regulations.
b) Where fire-resisting glass is required, comply with the specified fire ratings and Section Z25
and ensure that beadings, gaskets, etc. are suitable for the fire rating to be achieved.
c) Reaction to fire properties: The external surfaces of the cladding shall comply with functional
requirement of the NFPA, the Fire Strategy Report and Local Building Regulations.
d) Any insulation in the external wall construction that is exposed in a ventilated cavity shall be
non-combustible.
H11.1428 Joint System Required

Joints made within or between fire resistance-rated assemblies shall be protected with a joint system
that is designed and tested to prevent the spread of fire for a time period equal to that of the
assembly in which the joint is located. Such materials, systems, or devices shall be tested as part of
the assembly in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E 1966, Standard Test Method for Fire-
Resistive Joint Systems, or ANSI/ UL 2079, Standard for tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint
Systems.
H11.1430 Fire Stopping between Floors

a) Comply with the fire strategy report and NFPA 251.
b) Submit details of suitable products, including fire tests information complying with the relevant
test methods.
Durability
H11.1431 General
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full service life of the works, as stated in the
Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
H11.1432 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

a) The works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently
hard (including glass coatings) to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects in
accordance with BS EN 356.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out to all assemblies adjacent to pedestrian areas in accordance
with the recommendations of BS 8200. Tests shall conform to category B requirements.
c) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall also be submitted to the Architect.
H11.1433 Demountability
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/or replacement of glazed units in the event of breakage.
b) The removal of glazed units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other
part of the works. Provide a method statement for removal and replacement of glass panels for
acceptance.
Components
H11.1434 Primary Components

Primary components are all components with a predicted service life of not less than the design life of
the curtain wall without the need for maintenance (with the exception of glass), other than regular
cleaning. The following components shall be considered primary components:
a) All framing and its fixings and means of attachment to the structure.
b) Panels and their fixings.
c) Thermal insulation and vapour barriers.
d) Flashings, gutters, cappings, and similar metal weathering elements.
e) Support steelwork.
f) Sealants, which are concealed within the system and which cannot be inspected without

rooflight system.
8/06/07
dismantling the works.

g) Finishes to metal components.
H11.1435 Secondary Components

a) Secondary components are all components with a predicted service life of less than the design
life of the curtain wall, assuming regular cleaning and maintenance in accordance with
information to be provided by the curtain wall supplier. The following components shall be
considered secondary components:
i) Internal linings.
ii) Window and door equipment.
iii) Gaskets and compression seals.
iv) Other sealants.
v) Glass and glazing components.
vi) Motors, actuators and ancillaries.
b) Secondary components shall be capable of replacement without dismantling the works, or
compromising the structural or weatherproof integrity of the system. Components shall be
capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of the works.
c) The predicted service life of secondary components shall be stated and guidance on the
required maintenance provided.
Services
H11.1436 Cables within Box Sections

a) As specified, aluminium box sections shall be capable of containing electrical cables serving
security/access equipment to doors, activators to opening vents, others, as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
b) Openings for the installation of cables shall be provided by the Contractor, after discussion and
agreement with the Architect.
H11.1437 Opening Lights

a) Unless specified otherwise, opening lights shall comply with BS 6375: Part 2 and with all the
performance criteria specified herein.
b) Opening lights shall not disengage from the fixed areas of the works when open or closed
under any of the specified loads.
c) When fastened in the closed position the opening lights shall not be capable of removal from
the fixed areas of the works except by deliberate action from the interior of the building or from
actuation by the BMS system (smoke pressure equalisation vents).
d) Hinge mechanisms for opening lights shall be such that electrical continuity is maintained for all
opening lights and any limitations in this respect shall be stated in the Tender.
Blinds
H11.1438 General
a) Blinds shall operate with minimal noise, smoothly and consistently for the service life as
specified.
b) All blinds shall be easily operated by a single person using the intended operating mechanism.
H11.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
H11.2100 SYSTEMS
Wall Cladding Systems
H11.2101 Framing to Screen Cladding

a) Solid Stainless Steel frames:
i) Solid stainless steel fabricated posts/framing as shown on the Design Drawings.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Grade of stainless steel to be 1.4401 and of designation to avoid the occurrence of
stress corrosion cracking.
iii) Profiles/dimensions as shown on the Design Drawings.
iv) Stainless steel to be shot peened or to have brushed finish (to be confirmed).
v) Refer to Section Z11 for stainless steel generally.
b) Extruded aluminium:
i) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium generally.
ii) Panels to be sufficiently thick sheets as required to satisfy the design intent and the
performance criteria.
iii) All edges polished and arrissed.
iv) Aluminium to be PVDF painted internally and colour anodised externally.
v) Panels to be cast to suit the required patterns.
vi) Refer to the Design Drawings for details of pattern types.
vii) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent
and visual requirements.
c) Fixings: All fixings shall be concealed. Provide aluminium bracketry as required finished to match
the screen.
d) All screens to be demountable.
e) Timber framing:
i) Timber: Timber species to be as follows: (Options to be costed separately)
• Preferred option: Dark hardwood (similar in colour to Nyatoh).
• Option 1: Hardwood veneered MRMDF (veneer colour to be similar to Nyatoh).
Note that this option is not for use externally and shall only be used above a height
of 2.5m above each floor level. The preferred option should be used below this
point.
ii) Final finish of timber to be no more than 10% gloss.
iii) Main mullion frames shall be manufactured from solid timber either side of a stainless
steel flat section to profile as shown on the Design Drawings. Transoms and other framing
members to comprise solid hardwood (with stainless steel reinforcement as required to
suit spans). Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the
design intent visual requirements.
iv) Grade: Timber quality grading to be at least equivalent to grade J10 to BS EN 942 or
other equivalent standard to be agreed with the CA. Strength grading to comply with BS
5756. The Contractor shall select the most suitable strength grades to suit the
performance requirements as applicable.
v) Timber for lamination to be selected by mechanical or visual grading to BS EN 519, BS
5756 and BS 4978 respectively or other acceptable International standard as
appropriate.
vi) Timber quality and grades to be selected to meet the performance requirements to
comply with Eurocode 5 (DD ENV 1995), BS EN 338, BS EN 386, BS 5268, BS EN
391, BS EN 392 as relevant. Timber durability to be a moderately durable timber with low
movement potential to comply with BS EN 350.
vii) Timber to be selected from slow growing, fine grained sources with density of between
450-800kg/ m³ (gross density).
viii) Timber to be preservative treated using a suitable solvent-free (water based) anti-fungal
preservative treatment. Treatment to be of the immersion process type and suited to clear
finishes being applied to timber without any likelihood of discolouration of timber. Comply
with the requirements of Section Z12 as relevant. Preservative treatment to present no
health hazards to building occupants during the life of the building. Treatment to be of the
immersion process type and suited to clear finishes being applied to timber without any
likelihood of discolouration of timber.**

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ix) Timber finish to be a planed natural finish (i.e. no applied unless otherwise specified) to
all exposed faces.
x) All edges of timber to be eased (i.e. no sharp corners). radius 2mm.
xi) Expansion/ contraction co-efficients to be established and appropriate jointing methods
used to accommodate the required expansion and contraction.
xii) Jointing shall be discreet tight joints housed/morticed as required.
xiii) Bending stress of timber shall be calculated and shall not exceed allowable limits.
xiv) Moisture content to be appropriate to the relevant internal climatic conditions including
during construction and, unless otherwise agreed with the Architect, to be 15% ± 1.5.
The maximum difference between adjacent laminations to be 2%. Refer to Section A for
environmental data.
xv) Refer to Section Z10 for further requirements for timber.
f) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
H11.2102 Bronze Cladding/Screens/Framing/Features

a) Refer to the Design Drawings for details of pattern types.
b) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
c) Bronze:
i) Material: Of a suitable grade and alloy.
ii) Bronze for glazing bars to be extruded using a suitable alloy for extrusion purposes and to
suit the strength and performance requirements.
iii) Refer to Section Z11 for bronze generally.
iv) For flat/folded panels, bronze to be sufficiently thick sheets as required to satisfy the
design intent, flatness criteria and the performance criteria.
v) All exposed edges to be either press-folded sheet or arrissed.
vi) Bronze to be pre-patinated as Section Z11.
vii) Panels to be carefully formed to suit the required patterns.
d) Fixings: All fixings shall be concealed. Provide bronze bracketry as required to match the
screen.
H11.2103 Insulated Backing Wall System

a) Studwork: Galvanised mild steel or stainless steel concealed studwork/framing at centres as
required forming structural inner wall with fixing rails and wind posts as required to support the
screen cladding. The Contractor shall design the studwork to comply with the requirements of
the Specification.
b) Insulation to be provided within the partition system (between studs/framing) as specified
herein to achieve the U-values required. Insulation to be of non-combustible mineral wool or
acceptable equivalent to meet the requirements of the Specification.
c) Outer lining: The outer layer shall comprise of a waterproof layer with lining comprising of one of
the following as shown on the design drawings.
i) Ensure that no fixings are protruding.
ii) Colour anodised aluminium panels.
iii) Veneered timber panels.
d) Inner Lining: 2 layers of 12.5mm plasterboard inner linings fixed to the metal framing.
e) All structural bracing shall be included to cater for the design loading criteria including
pattresses/fixing rails as required.
f) The backing wall system shall provide the breather membrane and vapour barrier to the overall
wall build-up as an integral part of the design. The breather membrane to be fixed to the outer
lining to provide a continuous weather proof membrane which shall be dressed as required to

rooflight system.
8/06/07
take water away from the building/cladding.

g) Metal to metal contact shall be isolated to avoid noise emanating from the system under
differential wind loading.
h) The backing wall shall accommodate the required deflection in the structure without resulting in
damage to framing or panels and shall include adjustable bracketry as required. Refer to the
Structural Engineer's Movement and Tolerance Report.
i) The system shall include all clips, flashings, seals, trims, windpost steelwork including all
bracketry, fixings and interfaces necessary to complete the fabrication and installation.
j) The Contractor shall provide all connections, bracketry and fixings to the primary steelwork as
necessary. No visible fixings will be permitted.
H11.2104 Aluminium Louvres

a) Single bank shallow section louvre system integrated into the cladding system as required as
shown on the Design Drawings. Louvres to comprise extruded aluminium profiles to satisfy the
design intent as shown on the Design Drawings with PVF4 finish. Refer to Section Z11.
b) Louvres to provide class A rain defence to comply with the HEVAC standard and to incorporate
sand traps and insect mesh.
c) Aluminium louvre blades shall comprise single piece extrusions of profile depth/pitch as
indicated on the Design Drawings with aluminium framing, end capping pieces, connectors and
support bracketry as required for fixing back to the curtain wall mullions.
d) The aluminium extrusions shall be to BS EN 573: Parts 1-3, BS EN 515 and BS EN 755: Parts
1-9.
e) Refer to the M&E specification for requirements for blanking panels, dynamic performance,
pressure drop and free area requirements for all louvers.
f) Provide blanking plates to all non-active louvres. Blanking plates to be PVF4 finished matt black.
Refer to the M&E Specification and Drawings for requirements for blanking panels.
H11.2105 Timber Cladding/Screens/Framing/Solar Shading/Features

a) Solid hardwood with stainless steel/aluminium supports/bracketry as shown on the Design
Drawings.
b) Timber species as follows:
• Preferred option: Dark hardwood – Colour to be similar to Nyatoh (Revision to
original Tender Issue)
• Option 1: Hardwood veneered MRMDF (veneer colour to be similar to Nyatoh).
Note that this option is not for use externally and shall only be used above a height
of 2.5m above each floor level. The preferred option should be used below this
point.
c) Grade: Class J10 to BS EN 942. Strength grading to comply with BS 5756. The Contractor
shall select the most suitable strength grades to suit the performance requirements as
applicable.
d) Timber durability to be a moderately durable timber with low movement potential to comply with
BS EN 350.
e) Knots: Size, types allowed, plugs, inserts, fillers and distribution of knots shall be in accordance
with the relevant clause in BS EN 942. Unsound, dead and loose knots shall not be present on
any visible face. Making good as described in BS EN 942 shall not be acceptable. Arris, splay,
margin and branched knots are not acceptable.
f) Cutting: Quarter cut.
g) Jointing shall be discreet tight joints housed/morticed as required.
h) Discoloured sapwood is not acceptable. Refer to BS EN 942.
i) Timber for lamination to be selected by mechanical or visual grading to BS EN 519, BS 5756
and BS 4978 respectively or other acceptable International standard as appropriate.
j) Finish timber to be planed and natural (i.e. no applied finish unless otherwise specified).
(**Alternative provide a low build stain in colour to match the selected timber**).

rooflight system.
8/06/07
k) Moisture content to be appropriate to the relevant internal climatic conditions including during
construction and, unless otherwise agreed with the Architect, to be 15% ± 1.5. The maximum
difference between adjacent laminations to be 2%. Refer to Section A for environmental data.
H11.2106 Aluminium Shading Devices

a) Aluminium to comply with Section Z11.
b) Aluminium components to have PVF2/polyester powder coat finish finish (TBC). Colour to be
confirmed..
c) Refer to the M&E documentation for the specification of controls.
d) All visible metal elements shall be new and free from visible defects or performance defects.
Finishes shal be free from any blemishes, tool or die marks, striations or defects of any kind.
e) All moving parts shall move freely and shall be self-lubricating. Ensure that the system is
designed to not be affected by the presence of sand.
f) The following information shall be supplied for every item component and/ or system:
ii) A full description of operating requirements, giving any special features.
iii) A full breakdown of the parts and the catalogue number of the constituent parts.
g) Provide all associated bracketry/ cleats and fixings to fix the system to the primary
structure/cladding as required.
h) No product names, manufacturer's names or reference numbers or identifying marks shall
appear on the finished surface of any component.
Glazing
H11.2110 Glass Types (Refer to section Z25 for general glass clauses)
a) GL-01: Neutral body tinted double glazed unit (solar control) with low reflectivity and good light
transmittance.
b) GL-02: Double glazed coloured glass (body tinted) unit (solar control).
c) GL-03: Neutral body tinted double glazed unit (solar control).
d) GL-10 Neutral body tinted double glazed unit (solar control).
e) GL-11: Double glazed coloured glass (body tinted) unit (solar control).
f) GL-12: Curved clear double glazing to rooflight.
Blinds
H11.2112 Fabric Blinds to Rooflights (SHD-04)

a) Electrically operated fabric roller blind with aluminium bracketry and supports connected to the
steelwork/framing as shown on the Design Drawings.
b) Fabric material shall be solar control screen fabric as follows:
i) Reflective fibre - fire: Fabric to achieve a minimum of type B flammability to BS 5867: Part
2 and class 0 spread of flame when tested to BS 476.
ii) Colour: To be confirmed to match accepted samples.
iii) Open area: To comply with the solar shading requirements (To be confirmed).
iv) The Contractor shall submit technical data for fabrics for blinds giving material properties
including breaking strength, weight, thickness, colourfastness, dimensional stability for
c) Motorised operation with motor concealed within the headbox, with 2 No. key controlled
switches:
i) Blinds shall be automatically operated with provision for local manual override and control.
Blinds in each location shall be able to be automatically reset in any position.
ii) Each operating motor - powered by 230 V ac - shall have an automatic cut-out at both
ends of its travel.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iii) A double weighted bottom bar shall reduce friction and ensure that the cover remains
tensioned to maximum possible degree.
d) Accessories:
i) The aluminium roller shall be concealed within extruded aluminium headbox with polyester
powder coat finish to be agreed with the CA. The headbox shall be fitted as shown on the
Design Drawings. The Contractor shall provide details showing typical interface with
window, curtain walling and soffits using concealed fixings.
ii) Extruded aluminium bottom rails shall match the headbox finish.
e) Aluminium components to have PVF2/polyester powder coat finish finish (TBC). Colour to be
confirmed..
f) Refer to the M&E documentation for the specification of controls.
g) All visible metal elements shall be new and free from visible defects or performance defects.
Finishes shal be free from any blemishes, tool or die marks, striations or defects of any kind.
h) Mechanisms shall incorporate overload devices to prevent damage from excessive operating
forces.
i) The works shall provide a robust, smoothly operating installation that meets the performance
requirements, irrespective of the blind's dimensions and shall, with routine maintenance, retain
its original appearance and performance throughout its design life.
j) All moving parts shall move freely and shall be self-lubricating.
k) The following information shall be supplied for every item component and/ or system:
ii) A full description of operating requirements, giving any special features.
iii) A full breakdown of the parts and the catalogue number of the constituent parts.
l) Provide all associated bracketry/ cleats and fixings to fix blinds to the primary structure/cladding
as required.
m) No product names, manufacturer's names or reference numbers or identifying marks shall
appear on the finished surface of any component.
n) Profiles shall be true to line, angle and curvature as indicated on the Design Drawings.
o) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium and stainless steel generally.
H11.2114 Floor Channel Profiles

a) Refer to the Design Drawings for dimensions and profile.
b) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
c) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium and steelwork generally.
d) The channel profile is required to be capable of accommodating wheels associated with the
travelling/sliding maintenance ladder/platform system and shall be designed to accommodate
the relevant point loads associated with this system. Refer to the relevant façade access report
for details of loads/wheels etc.
e) Fixings/Bracketry: Provide aluminium or steel bracketry as required with suitable corrosion
protection. All fixings and bracketry shall be concealed unless otherwise shown on the Design
Drawings.
H11.2200 MATERIALS
General
H11.2201 Fabric Specifications

a) For metalwork requirements refer to Section Z11 of the Specification.
b) For fixings/adhesives refer to Section Z20 of the Specification.
c) For sealants requirements refer to Section Z22 of the Specification.
d) For glass and coatings requirements refer to Section Z25 of the Specification.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
e) For metalwork finishes requirements refer to Section Z30 of the Specification.

f) For powder coatings refer to Section Z31 of the Specification.
g) For PVDF coatings refer to Section Z32 of the Specification.
h) For anodising requirements refer to Section Z33 of the Specification.
i) For micaceous iron oxide (MIO) requirements refer to Section Z34 of the Specification.
j) For gasket requirements refer to Section Z36 of the Specification.
Frames
H11.2202 Glass Retaining Frames Generally

a) Unless otherwise specified, glass retaining frames shall be manufactured from fabricated
stainless steel, extruded aluminium or extruded bronze as specified. Shop Drawings shall show
the final extrusion design while strictly maintaining the Architect's visual requirements.
b) All corners shall be jointed and sufficiently flush, flat and true to comply with the specified
tolerances.
c) Frames shall be fully gasketed with vulcanised corners where in the same plane and forming the
air and vapour barrier. No butting on Site shall be permitted.
d) Unless otherwise agreed with the Architect, frames shall be factory-glazed, delivered and
installed in one piece.
e) The frames shall safely and securely retain the glass by means of a combination of dry gaskets,
structural silicone and/or adequate aluminium/stainless steel locating pieces.
f) All framing shall utilise the minimum cross section necessary to maintain rigidity and
performance.
g) Framing shall include a glazing chamber separated by two seals, one outside the glazing
chamber, the other at the back. The glazing chamber shall be drained to the outside, this
system shall comprise:
i) An outer seal designed to prevent water ingress into glazing or other chambers to
substantially inhibit water penetration and to prevent heavy wetting of the back seal.
Designs having full width gasket seals shall incorporate capillarity breaks to prevent the
ingress and entrapment of water between surfaces in continuous contact.
ii) A back seal. This seal shall act as an air seal to minimise air permeability up to limits as
specified. If subjected to light wetting in localised patches it shall prevent the ingress of
this water to the inside face of the works. (Note: Designs relying upon single stage seals
shall not be used).
iii) State, in the Contractor’s Proposals, the spacings of drainage outlets for acceptance by
the Architect and demonstrate the adequacy and suitability of such spacings.
h) Framing for inclined glazing shall match the vertical curtain walling but designed for use as
overhead glazing with drainage channels as required within to take water to the outside of the
building.
H11.2203 Glass Retaining Frames (Structural Silicone Glazing System)

a) Provide a design for prefabricated, unitised, aluminium, stainless steel or bronze frames made of
thermally broken or separated extrusions/fabrications as specified, for the structural silicone
glazed units.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the concept of the framing shall be a four-sided structural silicone
glazing system with minimal framing being visible from the outside.
c) The framing shall be based on the pressure equalisation principle incorporating an external skin
acting as a water and weather barrier and an internal skin providing the required air and vapour
tight seal. Special openings in the framing shall comply with current glazing recommendations in
size, spacing and location and shall be provided to the exterior of the frames in order to ventilate
around the double glazing units, creating a drainage system for any water or moisture. All
draining provisions shall be provided at the lowest level of the glazing rebates or framing system
cavities to positively prevent any residue water from remaining within.
d) Allow for all glazing frame members to consist of two separate profiles complying with all
structural and surface treatment requirements. Framing shall be assembled using composite

rooflight system.
8/06/07
profiles with a proven continuous thermal break material. The thermal break system shall
minimise the thermal transmittance, noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on any of the
internal surfaces of the framing members, the composite metal panels or the glazing under the
extremes of the design temperatures stated herein.
e) Where structural silicone is specified as the preferred means of panel fixation, it is the visual
intent achieved by this method of fixing that is required. Where secondary means of retention/
support are required to satisfy the performance requirements and/ or local statutory
requirements, these shall be minimal and inconspicuous. All means of retention/ support shall
be clearly indicated as part of the tender return and also after Detailed Design on the Working
Drawings for acceptance by the Architect.
f) The framing profiles shall be detailed to allow for the secure attachment of continuous sealing
gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the glazing rebates as well as connections for
thermal break strips and provision for seals, corner cleats, brackets,butt joint spigots, clip-in
aluminium/bronze or stainless steel profiles etc. All of this shall be with due consideration to the
structural requirements, the specified type of surface treatment and to achieve the specified
solar shading, thermal transmittance and sound reduction values.
g) The framing profiles shall be factory assembled into unit frames by means of mitred corners,
mechanically jointed with cleats or with butted corners and the appropriate additional sealant.
The frames shall be structurally sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified wind and
dead load forces that may act on them, in particular during transportation and erection on Site.
The whole framing system shall be detailed to accommodate, without distortion or other
adverse effects, any differential structural and thermal movements.
h) Thermally broken or separated split mullion expansion joints shall be incorporated into the works
wherever required to allow for the thermal movement within the assembly. The outside
dimensions and appearance of these split mullions shall correspond exactly with the standard
frame profiles so that there is no visual distinction between these components. The split
mullions shall be rigid and able to safely withstand any additional forces which may act on the
units, either during transportation or erection on Site, taking into account structural
requirements, the surface treatment, thermal transmittance and sound reduction values. The
entire split mullion system shall be detailed to accommodate, without distortion or other adverse
effects, any differential structural and thermal movements.
i) Weather seals shall be provided at all interfacing connections. The vapour barrier shall always
be installed on the warm side of the thermal insulation to provide a continuous air and vapour
tight seal at all interfacing joints and intersections between the units and the building structure.
j) All framing shall be detailed in order that any necessary replacement of damaged glazing units,
as well as doors, windows and structural silicone glazed components, can be carried out from
outside the building with minimum disturbance to occupants, except for any internal glazing
systems.
H11.2204 Glass Retaining Frames with Dry Pressure Glazing System

a) Prefabricated, unitised, aluminium, stainless steel or bronze frames made of thermally broken or
separated extrusions/fabrications for the glazed units.
b) The concept of all the framing shall be detailed to receive a fully pressure equalised glazing
system. The principle shall incorporate an external skin surface acting as a water and weather
barrier and an internal skin surface as an air and vapour tight seal. Special openings shall
comply with the current glazing recommendations in size, spacing and location and be provided
to the exterior of the horizontal glazing and cladding in order to guarantee air ventilation around
the double glazing units and the insulated spandrel panels and to create a drainage system for
any water or moisture. All draining provisions shall occur at the lowest level of the glazing
rebates or framing system cavities to positively prevent any residue water from remaining within.
c) All glazing frame members consisting of two separate framing profiles shall comply with all
structural and surface treatment requirements. These framing extrusions shall be fixed to
composite framing profiles with a proven continuous thermal break material. The thermal break
system shall minimise the thermal transmittance and noise transfer while inhibiting condensation
on any of the internal surfaces of the framing members.
d) The framing profiles shall be detailed to incorporate any necessary glazing beads, continuous
sealing gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the glazing rebates, connections for
thermal break strips and provision for seals, connection spigots, corner cleats, clip-in metal
profiles, fixing brackets, etc. All of this shall be with due consideration to the structural
requirements, the specified type of surface treatment and to achieve the specified thermal

rooflight system.
8/06/07
transmittance sound reduction values.

e) The thermally broken or separated framing profiles shall be factory assembled into unit frames
by means of mitred corners, mechanically jointed with cleats and the appropriate additional
sealant. The frames shall be structurally sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified
wind and dead load forces, being sufficiently rigid to safely withstand any forces that may act on
them during transportation and erection on Site. The whole framing system shall be detailed to
accommodate, without distortion or other adverse effects, any differential structural and thermal
movements.
f) Weather seals shall be provided at all interfacing connections. The vapour barrier shall be
installed on the warm side of the thermal insulation to provide a continuous air and vapour tight
seal at all interfacing joints and intersections between the window and cladding units and the
building structure and/or the precast elements respectively.
g) All aluminium window framing shall be detailed in order that any necessary replacement of
double glazing units can be carried out from outside the building except for internal glazing
systems.
h) Special thermal break provisions shall be employed in the case of the curved window frames to
achieve all of the specified performance requirements of these special window units. The
curved aluminium profiles shall display a uniform radius and shall be free of any rolling marks,
imprints, scratches or distortion.
i) All aluminium extrusions and components shall be composite profiles or units with integral
continuous thermal break provisions. Under extremes of design temperatures and relative
humidity, no condensation shall appear on any internal surface of the framing member, the
composite metal panels or the glazing.
H11.2205 Stainless Steel Framing

a) Stainless steel to be grade 1.4401 stainless steel.
b) Visible stainless steel to have satin 240 grit brushed finish or a shot peened finish.
c) Ensure that stainless steel grades are selected to ensure that stress corrosion cracking does
not occur.
d) Refer to Section Z11 for stainless steel generally.
H11.2206 Solid Insulated Aluminium Faced Panels

a) Insulated aluminium faced panels integrated into the curtain walling system forming spandrel
panels including gasketed joints. Panels shall provide a flat surface and be designed to prevent
the ingress of moisture interstitially or into the building.
b) Insulation to be mineral wool (non-combustible) of suitable thickness and material properties to
meet the U-values, thermal performance as required.
c) Facings: Aluminium Alloy Sheet. Refer to Z11 for sheet aluminium requirements generally.
Panels shall be designed to span between supports as required. Finish type and colour to
match curtain walling framing.
d) Gaskets and all joints shall be fully sealed with double seals to satisfy the water penetration
H11.2207 Solid Insulated Bronze Faced Panels

a) Insulated bronze faced panels integrated into the glazed walling system forming cladding panels
including gasketed joints. Panels shall provide a flat surface and be designed to prevent the
ingress of moisture interstitially or into the building. Bronze to have pre-patinated finish.
b) Insulation to be mineral wool (non-combustible) of suitable thickness and material properties to
meet the U-values, thermal performance as required.
c) Facings: Bronze (copper alloy) Sheet. Refer to Z11 for sheet bronze requirements and
patination requirementsgenerally. Panels shall be designed to span between supports as
required. Finish type and colour to match curtain walling framing.
d) Gaskets and all joints shall be fully sealed with double seals to satisfy the water penetration
H11.2208 Glass-To-Glass Corners

a) Where glass-to-glass corners are required, outer glass layer of the double glazed unit shall be
rooflight system.
8/06/07
cantilevered and sealant bonded as required. Where the transoms cantilever horizontally to
support elements of the cladding provide inner stain less steel corner ties. Details shall
accommodate movements of the building without compromising the weather resistance and
watertightness. Corners shall stay rigid and maintain their appearance.
b) Glass to glass corners shall have an internal aluminium extrusion for stability and sealing
purposes.
Joints
H11.2209 Movement Joints

a) The requirement for any movement joints within the works shall be ascertained to accommodate
all movements stated herein. The works shall accommodate all movements of the joint in a
manner that does not compromise weather resistance and watertightness.
b) Maintenance of the works joints shall be by visual inspection. Externally and internally, vertical
movement joints shall appear as similar to the standard glazing system joint as possible. The
material used at the movement joint locations shall not be thermally broken or separated.
Windows
H11.2210 Opening Windows

a) Provide prefabricated, unitised aluminium/stainless steel or bronze frames incorporating
opening casements with structural silicone glazing, and/or gaskets as required comprising
thermally broken or separated framing components.
b) Where required, opening windows shall be fabricated using cantilevered front pane double
glazing with aluminium/stainless steel or bronze inner framing as required (referred to as
frameless). The glazing shall be supported using factory applied structural silicone jointing
between back framing and glazing. All opening vents shall open to the outside/inside as shown
on the Design drawings.
c) Opening windows/casements shall comprise manually and/or automatically operated, bottom or
top hung, opening out casements as shown on the Design Drawings, with concealed restrictor
stays being installed into the framing in lieu of the fixed light glazing, wherever indicated on the
Design Drawings. Smoke control provision shall be maintained in accordance with BS 5588:
Parts 5 and 11 and BS EN 12101: Part 6 and as required by the District Surveyor/Building
Control Officer and/or the Fire Brigade respectively.
d) Where required to be electrically opening, windows shall be fitted with electrically powered
actuators geared to open and close the windows automatically, and to retain them safely open.
Opening windows shall be provided with a local control panel, to be mounted below the false
floor, with control wiring from control panel to window actuator; all fire rated in accordance with
BS 5839 and BS EN 54. Panels shall include stand-by batteries for continuous operation of
vents for a 3-hour period in the event of loss of mains power.
e) Opening frames shall be mitred at the corners and sufficiently accurately cut to prevent the
display of unfinished metal at mitre joints.
f) Section profiles shall comply with glazing rebate depth, width and edge clearance specified by
the glass sealed unit manufacturer or, in the absence of such specific recommendation, with the
provisions of BS 6262. The sealed unit manufacturer’s fabricating tolerances shall be
accommodated. Frames shall be sufficient to restrain the glass under maximum positive and
negative wind pressures.
g) Include for all framing members of the opening casements to comprise two separate metal
profiles, to comply with all structural and surface treatment requirements. The framing to
comprise composite framing profiles with a proven continuous thermal break. The thermal break
system shall minimise the thermal transmittance noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on
any of the internal surfaces of the framing members.
h) Where opening sections and curtain wall framing sections are required to align, the external
dimensions and appearance of the framing for the opening casements shall correspond exactly
to the perimeter sub-frames for the fixed light glazing so that no visual distinction between these
components can be made. The framing of the opening casements shall be fixed into the
supporting window frames by means of heavy-duty aluminium or stainless steel hinges and
concealed opening restrictor stays. The interfacing joint between the opening casements and
the window frames shall be provided with a minimum of two perimeter sealing gaskets inserted
into corresponding grooves in the aluminium profiles, creating an external rain barrier and the
internal airtight vapour barrier required for a pressure equalised window system. The space

rooflight system.
8/06/07
between these gaskets shall be ventilated and drained to the outside of the assembly.
i) Special aluminium/stainless steel/bronze extrusions shall be installed into corresponding
grooves in the external side of the framing profiles of the opening casements to provide the
loadbearing bonding surfaces between structural silicone joint and the supporting framework.
j) Special aluminium/stainless steel/bronze extrusions shall be installed into corresponding
grooves in the external side of the glazing sub-frame profiles to provide the dead loadbearing
support for the cured silicone glass setting blocks.
k) Special aluminium/stainless steel/bronze extrusions shall be installed from the outside to the
perimeter glazing sub-frames to provide a slim perimeter mechanical safety restraint for the
structural silicone glazed double glazing units. This continuous external perimeter glass restraint
framing shall be detailed to provide minimal metal visible externally. The external surface of
these perimeter safety restraints shall be flush with the external surface of the double glazing
units.
l) The extrusions for the framing of the opening casements shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous sealing gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the
glazing rebates as well as connections for thermal break strips and provision for seals, corner
cleats, clip-in aluminium profiles, such as the special natural anodised aluminium extrusions for
the bonding of the structural silicone and the continuous perimeter aluminium safety rails for the
four-sided structural silicone glazing, heavy-duty aluminium or stainless steel hinges, concealed
stainless steel opening restraints, concealed multi-point locking devices with budget locks, etc.
All of this under due consideration of the structural requirements, the specified type of surface
treatment and to achieve the specified thermal transmittance and sound reduction values.
m) The thermally broken aluminium or separated profiles shall be factory assembled into opening
casement unit frames by means of mitred corners, mechanically jointed with cleats and the
appropriate additional sealant. The entire opening casement assemblies shall be structurally
sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified wind and dead load forces. They shall be
sufficiently rigid to safely withstand any additional forces that may act onto these assemblies, in
particular during transport and erection on Site. The opening casements shall be detailed to
accommodate, without distortion, water leakage, noise or other adverse effects and/or any
differential structural and thermal movements.
n) All opening casements shall be detailed in order that they may be removed from outside the
building in the event of replacement of damaged double glazing units, so as to create minimum
disturbance to the occupants of the building.
o) The heavy-duty hinges shall be manufactured from aluminium or austenitic stainless steel to fully
comply with all applicable and specified wind and dead load forces. They shall be sufficiently
rigid to safely withstand any additional forces which may act onto the opening casements whilst
being operated or when they are in their closed or open position.
p) Opening casements shall incorporate two fully concealed mechanical opening angle restrictors
with a built-in mechanism to hold the opening casement rigidly in its open position under the full
specified design wind load until the locking latch is manually released.
Doors
H11.2211 General
a) Refer to the Door and Ironmongery Schedule for ironmongery requirements. Interface with the
M&E requirements regarding all security access requirements.
b) Refer to the Fire Strategy Report for fire resistant requirements.
c) Generally all doors to be of a robust nature to conform with DD171 and PAS 24. Where fire
rated doors are required, these shall incorporate fire rated glazing and glazing methods
including fire rated seals.
d) All doors shall prevent unauthorised entry by removing hinges or locking devices.
e) The client shall advise on the mastering requirements.
f) Comply with the requirements of BS 8300.
g) All cables/ conduits to be integrated and concealed in door frames. Draw wires to be provided
for connections by others.
h) Manifestation for all doors to be as referred to in Section Z25.
i) All doors opening outwards unless otherwise shown on the Tender Drawings.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
j) Door frames and associated glazing to achieve the required maximum air leakage rates,
weathertightness, acoustic performance and U-values as specified.
H11.2212 Bronze Doors

a) Where forming solid doors within the system, doors shall be robust 'heavy-duty' grade doors,
with bronze frames, as specified, designed to prevent the ingress of water and tested as
specified for water penetration and air permeability.
b) Solid panels: Bronze faced insulated panels with fully formed return edges and welded corners.
Folds with internal ‘V’ cut to reduce bending radius. All fixings concealed.
c) Bronze to have pre-patinated finish.
d) Glazing: Provide prefabricated, unitised bronze frames incorporating structural silicone glazing,
fabricated in thermally broken or separated extrusions.
e) Hinged doors shall be rebated, hung on heavy duty bronze hinges and fully weather-stripped at
head, jambs and sills with compression seals. Pivoting doors shall incorporate heavy-duty hung-
pivot mechanisms to suit door design and to prevent ingress of water.
f) Allow for thermally broken framing members for the leaf of the doors to suit the door weight and
size. The framing shall be assembled as composite framing profiles with a proven continuous
thermal break material. The thermal break system shall minimise the thermal transmittance and
noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on any of the internal surfaces of the framing
members.
g) The interfacing joint between the door leaf and the door frames shall incorporate two perimeter
sealing gaskets inserted into corresponding grooves in the framing profiles to create the
external rain barrier and the internal airtight vapour barrier. The space between these gaskets
shall be ventilated and drained to the outside of the door assembly.
h) The metal framing for the framing of the leaf for the doors shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous weather sealing gaskets within the framing.
i) All ironmongery shall be **satin stainless steel/bronze**, pull handles, locks, etc. to be agreed
with the Architect. See also Section P21.
H11.2214 Framed Glazed Doors

a) Where forming solid doors within the system, doors shall be robust 'heavy-duty' grade doors to
DD171 and PAS 24, with stainless steel (grade 1.4401) frames designed to prevent the
ingress of water and tested as specified for water penetration and air permeability.
b) Provide prefabricated, unitised aluminium frames incorporating single leaf doors with structural
silicone glazing, fabricated in thermally broken or separated aluminium extrusions.
c) Hinged doors shall be rebated and hung on grade 1.4401 stainless steel hinges and fully
weather-stripped at head, jambs and sills with compression seals. Pivoting doors shall
incorporate heavy-duty hung-pivot mechanisms to suit door design and to prevent ingress of
water.
d) Allow for thermally broken framing members for the leaf of the doors to suit the door weight and
size. The framing shall be assembled as composite framing profiles with a proven continuous
thermal break material. The thermal break system shall minimise the thermal transmittance and
noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on any of the internal surfaces of the framing
members.
e) The leaf of the doors shall be fixed into the supporting glazed walling system by means of
heavy-duty hinges manufactured from stainless steel or with sliding door gear mechanisms as
specified. The interfacing joint between the door leaf and the door frames shall incorporate two
perimeter sealing gaskets inserted into corresponding grooves in the framing profiles to create
the external rain barrier and the internal airtight vapour barrier. The space between these
gaskets shall be ventilated and drained to the outside of the door assembly.
f) The metal framing for the framing of the leaf for the doors shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous weather sealing gaskets within the framing.
g) All ironmongery shall be satin stainless steel, pull handles, locks, etc. to be agreed with the CA.
See also Section P21.
H11.2215 Ironmongery
a) Allow for co-ordination of all ironmongery with the security Contractor and provide ironmongery

rooflight system.
8/06/07
and wireways as required. Doors shall include concealed door contact magnets to be
integrated into the design of the door for connection to the B.M.S. Provide Access Control as
required (refer to the M&E Specification for requirements). Conceal all wiring within framework.
Mount all access control equipment recessed flush into door frames as side panels. Develop
details with M&E and Security Sub-Contractors and agree with the Architect.
b) External swing doors shall incorporate the following:
i) Concealed head mounted overhead door closers to minimum class C to BS EN 1154
with fully adjustable spring power and backcheck facility.
ii) D line satin stainless steel pull handles both inside and outside, 19mm diameter, as
scheduled in lengths as indicated on the Tender Drawings and Door/ Ironmongery
Schedules, using satin stainless steel (Allgood Ltd 'D line' or acceptable equivalent).
iii) Keyed locks of the pin tumbler, cylinder high security (anti-pick) type, with a minimum of 6
pins. Double cross cut or side-pin cylinders shall be removable when the door is open but
shall not be removable when the door is closed.
iv) Locking and latching devices shall be suited to the door design and shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 12209 category B locks and latches.
v) Suiteing to be co-ordinated with suiteing requirements for the building as a whole. Refer
to Section P21.
vi) Automatic power operated doors shall comply with BS 7036.
c) Where required, make provision for doors to remain in defaulted 'open position' in the event of a
fire emergency.
Glazing
H11.2216 Systems Generally

a) Select all glazing materials and systems to comply with the performance requirements.
b) Final selection of glass, thicknesses, together with type/heat treatments and location of
interlayer and coatings, shall remain the Contractor's responsibility.
c) Glass and coatings shall be in accordance with Section Z25 of the Specification.
d) Safety manifestation: Refer to the Design Drawings and Section Z25 of the Specification.
e) Unless otherwise specified or agreed with the Architect, solar and low e coatings to be
deposited under vacuum by magnetron sputtering process and which shall be located within
the cavity of the double glazed unit.
f) Panes to be separated by 16mm black or dark coloured bent spacer tube, automatically filled
with desiccant.
g) Spacer tubes shall be permanently sealed to the glass by a primary sealant in PIB and the entire
structure to be provided with a secondary sealant in silicone.
h) The solar performance criteria stated herein shall be achieved to +/-2% and measured in
accordance with EN 410. Emissivity coatings shall be measured to comply with
EN673/EN1298 and with tolerance of +/-0.1W/m²K.
i) Cavities of double glazed units to be filled with dehydrated air.
j) Glazing with SSG to have polished edges and corners.
H11.2217 Inclined Glazing

a) Inclined glazing shall comply with the Specification except that the rafter bars/transoms shall
drain directly to the outside at the bottom. Pressure plate fixing screws shall be sealed over with
low modulus clear silicone sealant.
b) The extrusion designers shall be consulted and their recommended torque settings used for
securing pressure plate fixing screws.
GRC
H11.2218 GRC Panels and screens to cladding system Generally

a) The panel units shall be manufactured to sizes indicated on the Working Drawings, and be
within the specified tolerance deviations.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
b) Submit details of fixing proposals for review by the Architect.

c) Refer to the Design Drawings for details of pattern types.
d) Bird mesh/spikes are to be integrated in a discreet manner during manufacture. Locations as
shown on design drawings.
e) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
f) Note that double casting of some profiles will be necessary as shown on the design drawings.
g) GRC:
i) Sand: Local Silica sand to GRCA `Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of
GRC products’, clause 2.3. Make provision for additional aggregate as may be required
to achieve the desired colour if necessary.
ii) Cement: To BS EN 197: Part 1, CEM 1 Portland cement.
iii) Glass fibre:
• Type: Alkali-resistant continuous filament fibre. To be compatible with Portland
cement.
• Compliance: In accordance with GRCA ‘Specification for alkali resistant glassfibre
rovings and chopped strands for reinforcement of cements and concretes’.
• Content shall be determined in accordance with BS EN 1170.
iv) Mix design and grade shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with GRCA
`Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC products’, clause 3.1, for
v) Mechanical properties of the GRC to be consistent and suited to the various profiles,
shapes, spans etc as required to meet the performance criteria.
vi) Mixing water:
• To BS EN 1008.
• Water shall be clean and free of impurities that may affect colour, stability, setting or
strength of panels.
vii) Admixtures:
• Submit proposals of proposed types.
• Calcium chloride based admixtures shall not be used where GRC contains cast-in
steel components or fixings.
• Not to contain more than 0.1% chloride Ions.
viii) Pigments:
• No artificial pigments should be added.
• The final selection of colour will be dependant upon the submitted samples
specified herein and the selection of the CA.
ix) Surface coatings: Provide proposals for acceptance by the CA.
x) Panels to be sufficiently thick sheets as required to satisfy the design intent and the
performance criteria.
xi) All surfaces to have eased corners.
xii) GRC to have acid etched finish texture and colour to be selected from the range of
proposed samples by the Architect.
h) Fixings:
i) All fixings shall be concealed. Fixing methods to be selected to suit the expected thermal
and moisture movement, shrinkage, hydration and the nature of materials to be fixed to as
well as the performance criteria to be satisfied. Provide suitable stainless steel bracketry
as required.
ii) All dissimilar metals to be separated to prevent bi-metallic corrosion.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
i) All screens to be demountable.

j) Curing:
i) Curing methods are to ensure sufficient strength is achieved to meet the design intent
and structural requirements.
ii) Panels must be kept continually moist during curing or the use of an acrylic thermoplastic
copolymer dispersion with the agreement of the CA.. Duration of curing times to be as per
the manufacturers instructions and suitable for the local conditions.
All reinforcement to be provided to GRC profiles as required to meet the performance requirements.
Provide continuous stainless steel edge framing (picture frame) to GRC panels for support purposes
cast flush into GRC as shown on the design drawings, unless it can be demonstrated to the CA that
this is not required.
H11.2119 Copings Generally

a) Aluminium copings comprising fully welded and/ or sealed coping system incorporating a
waterproof membrane underneath dressed down to roofing and cladding waterproofing as
required. Coping to have finishes as specified for the cladding types. Joints to occur as shown
on the Design Drawings. Where not indicated they should be located to coincide with cladding
grid.
b) Joints to be fully gasketed with recessed/ folded interconnecting joints to provide a neat flush
external appearance. Gaskets shall not be visible at joints.
c) Aluminium sheet shall be sufficiently thick or have suitable rigidising backing board to provide a
visually flat surface and to eliminate excessive distortion and permanent deformation caused by
solar radiation (min. 3mm).
d) Aluminium copings shall be formed from aluminium alloy sheets, fabricated from the most
appropriate grade and thickness of material complying with BS EN 485, BS EN 515 and BS
EN 573, in a temper suitable for the particular type of application and degree of forming to be
used. In addition, the alloy shall be selected to satisfy the requirements of the chosen finishing
process.
e) Gauge the selection of aluminium thickness/ profile and requirements for reinforcing, bracketry
and fixings to accommodate loads associated with wind loading as well as normal maintenance
access traffic (not generally to be designed to be walkable unless otherwise indicated on the
Tender Drawings).
f) Provide special corner pieces for changes in direction as shown on the Tender Drawings.
g) The coping systems shall be weatherproof and watertight, thus ensuring the prevention of water
leakage onto the internal face of the works, and any other part of the system, which may be
adversely affected.
h) All coping systems to be designed and installed to accommodate thermal expansion.
i) Gaskets shall be made of ethylene propylene material (EPDM/ EP). The colour of all gaskets
shall be black.
Flashings
H11.2220 Flashings
a) As indicated on the Design Drawings, aluminium flashings shall be provided. They shall be
treated with anti-drumming insulation on the protected face if required.
b) Flashings shall be PVF4 coated to match the cladding.
c) Externally exposed flashings shall have continuation and interconnecting joints fully complying
with the sealant manufacturer’s written recommendations for movement joints; simple butt
straps shall not be accepted.
Fixings
H11.2221 Fixings Requirements

Fixing components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of the
District Surveyor/ Building Control Officer/Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall
be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements. Select suitable components and fixings in accordance with the following:

rooflight system.
8/06/07
a) Stainless steel fixing components for the works shall comprise components of high grade
austenitic stainless steel exterior quality to BS EN 10088, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10087, BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10250: Part 4 and BS EN ISO 9445 and BS
8298.
b) Fixing bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be manufactured from high grade austenitic
stainless steel complying with BS EN ISO 3506: Parts 1 and 2. All screw fixings and
attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
c) All fixing brackets for the works shall comprise components of high grade austenitic stainless
steel exterior quality, grade 1.4401 to BS EN 10250: Part 4, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10095, BS
EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10258, BS EN 10259 and BS 8298,
complying with all statutory requirements both as to strength and type and shall be designed to
carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal
movements.
d) Any sheet mild steel used in the fixing assemblies shall comply with BS 7668, BS EN 10029,
BS EN 10210 and BS EN 10025: Parts 1-4 and 6 and rolled sections shall be used wherever
practicable or appropriate. Steel sections used shall be hot-dip galvanised to the requirements
of BS EN ISO 1461 after all cutting, drilling of holes and welding has been completed.
e) All non-visible supporting aluminium sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill
finished aluminium shall not be used. Aluminium sub-constructions shall be separated from
concrete by bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to BS EN
10088 may be used in lieu of aluminium for any supporting sub-constructions.
f) Ensure all fixings remain firm (i.e. do not loosen from their set positions) under vibration loads.
g) Refer to Section Z20 for fixings generally.
h) Details describing the design, materials, location and installation procedures of all anchorage
and fixing supports shall be fully described in the Shop Drawings.
i) Floor anchors cast into the concrete structure shall be non-corrosive.
j) Fixings shall be designed to ensure that they are not visible internally or externally in the
completed works, unless clearly shown on the Working drawings and accepted by the
Architect.
k) **Visible fixings shall comprise **hex-headed** bolts with **hex-headed** nuts, ensuring that
bolts are not excessive in length.
H11.2222 Fixing Directly to Concrete Structure

a) In general, cast-in channels shall be the method of connecting the façade brackets to the
structure.
b) Provide and install all fixing devices, including framing, bearing brackets, movement fixings, etc.
and carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting,
cutting for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast in, making good, including grouting-in of anchor
bolts, and fixing whatsoever necessary.
c) All fixings shall be to the slab edge face condition, to be co-ordinated with the superstructure
design.
d) Submit details of all fixings for review and acceptance by the Architect.
e) The contractor shall provide suitable cast-in brackets/fixings as required. Refer to the structural
engineers documentation and liaise with the relevant superstructure contractor to finalise the
detailing and all interfacing requirements.
Sealants and Gaskets
H11.2223 Sealants
a) Sealant shall not leak or bleed causing any discolouration and runoff staining below or above
horizontal joints shall be avoided either on stone facing or on elements.
b) Structural Silicone Sealants:
i) All glazing requiring structural silicone bonding shall be glazed under controlled factory
conditions without any need for Site applied structural bonding sealant, unless accepted
otherwise by the Architect.
ii) Structural sealant glazing design shall limit the design tensile stress of sealants to

rooflight system.
8/06/07
138kPa.
H11.2224 Gaskets
a) Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/EP) or of Silicone. The
colour of all gaskets shall be black.
b) All visible room side glazing gaskets shall have factory vulcanised corners. All other gaskets
shall have overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between. It is a condition that the
internal sealant of the entire envelope system has a continuous vapour and air seal. This also
includes all interfacing connections.
Miscellaneous Materials
H11.2225 H11.2225 Metal Studwork

a) Metal studs shall be fabricated from galvanised mild steel (or stainless steel if not accessible for
maintenance) designed to suit the wind loading requirements and loads associated with the
outer screen cladding systems and surface fixed components as required.
b) The framing/ stud system shall be fully concealed with appropriate fixings to the primary
structure soffit/ floor/ walls, etc. ensuring compliance with the design requirements of the
Specification.
c) Framing to be designed to accommodate fixings related to any face fixed cladding systems.
Where fixings penetrate the breather membrane ensure that a water and vapour tight seal is
achieved.
d) Provide windposts as required, designed to meet the wind loading criteria specified.
e) Refer to Section Z11 of the Specification for steel generally.
H11.2225 Breather Membrane

a) Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected both sides by
rigid facings/linings to give a Class 0 spread of flame to meet the performance criteria
specified.
b) Fix carefully and neatly to provide a complete barrier to water, snow and wind blown dust.
Horizontal laps to be 100mm, vertical laps 150mm and staggered, to shed water away from the
substrate and structure.
c) Provide all sealing at junctions as required.
H11.2225 Vapour Barrier

Provide an suitable barrier fully continuous to warm side of insulation and fixed to the cavity side of
the backing wall system as shown on the Design Drawings.
H11.2224 Damp-proof Membrane
a) The membrane shall be impermeable, rot-proof and resistant to specified extremes of movement
and environmental temperatures. The membrane shall be vapour resistant, vapour permeable
and airtight where necessary.
b) Submit details of proposed materials for review.
c) The material shall be composed of elastomer base (EPDM), or equivalent.
d) Substrates to receive bonding shall be free from dust and grease, free of cavities, ridges and
sharp projections and be primed to receive adhesive as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer. Surfaces that are not suitable to receive membrane shall be reported to the
Architect.
e) Membrane shall be lapped at least 100mm and bonded according to the manufacturer’s full
recommendations.
f) Other materials/testing standards may be put forward for review by the Architect.
H11.2225 Insulation
a) The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapour.
b) The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or in situ during
the life of the works.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) Insulation shall be LPCB certified to LPS 1181.

d) Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five. Refer also to Section A.6000 of the
Specification.
e) ***Insulation shall be selected to meet the recommendations of ‘The Green Guide to
Specification’ and shall have a minimal environmental impact when assessed using BREEAM
criteria.***
f) The selected insulation shall comply with all relevant British Standards and be BBA certified.
H11.2225 Standard Plasterboard

Aerated gypsum core plasterboard to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 1, with exposed surface
suitable for decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing or square edge boards for
surfaces to be finished as required.
H11.2225 Moisture Resistant Plasterboard

To BS 1230: Part 1, types 3 and 4 with moisture resistant core and moisture repellent paper facings.
Moisture resistant plasterboards (where specified as such) shall have moisture resistant liners with
additives, silicone or equivalent, to improve moisture resistance to absorb less than 5% of water by
weight in the total immersion test when tested in accordance with BS 1230: Part 1, and ASTM C
473 and less than 100g/ m² (BS 1230) of water in the surface water absorption tests.
H11.2225 Impact Resistant Plasterboard

Heavy-duty paper faced plasterboard with high density core to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 5,
with exposed surface suitable for decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing.
H11.2225 Foilbacked Plasterboard

Moisture resistant gypsum plasterboard with a metallised polyester film backing water vapour control
layer. The plasterboard base shall be to BS 1230: Part 1 with moisture vapour resistance of backing
layer not less than 60 MNs/ g.
H11.2225 Fire Resistant Plasterboard

Gypsum plasterboard with glass fibre and additives in core to improve fire resistance to BS 1230:
Part 1, classification type 5 and tested to BS 476: Parts 6 and 7 with exposed surface suitable for
decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing. Board to be moisture resistant where
required.
H11.2225 External Grade Board

Suitable proprietary external grade boards to be proposed by the Contractor.
Cladding Support Structure
H11.2226 Supports – All Architectural Steelwork

Provide a structural steel cladding support structure, as necessary, having due regard for any
requirements in excess of that indicated on the Structural Engineer's Drawings and also any
requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The structural steelwork shall comply with the
Structural Engineer's Steelwork Specification, including protective coatings.
Timber
H11.2227 Timber Generally

a) No damaged, rotten or discoloured materials shall be used.
b) Materials shall be relatively knot free, free from distortion, cracks or other blemishes.
c) All timber shall be selected for its final use:
i) If it is to be for internal use, timber shall be graded and stamped DRY or KD (kiln dried)
and shall have a moisture content of 20% or less.
ii) Where timber is to be used externally or in other high moisture content areas it shall be
graded and marked “wet”. Such timber shall not be used internally.
iii) All of the above are particularly important for dry structural timber.
d) Structural timber work shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and described in the

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Specification, designed to BS 5268 where applicable, or to the requirements of the

Specification.
e) All structural timber design and details shall comply with BS 5268 and satisfy the stated
loading requirements. Otherwise it shall be calculated from the information available and shall
satisfy the criteria in BS 5268.
f) All Shop Drawings shall include:
i) The geometry of the structure.
ii) Timber species, sizes and grades.
iii) All joints not detailed on the Design Drawings, including locations, and evidence in writing
that the joints are structurally adequate.
g) Where designed structures cannot be calculated in accordance with BS 5268: Part 2,
acceptance shall be sought from the CA, provided that the design requirements are satisfied
when tested to BS 5268: Part 2. The CA shall be notified at least 7 days prior to the date of
testing in order that he may be present when the structures are tested.
h) Moisture content at the time of erection shall not be more than:
i) Under cover in generally unheated spaces 24%.
ii) Under cover in generally heated spaces 20%.
iii) Internally in continuously heated spaces 20%.
H11.2228 Stress Grading of Timber

a) The Contractor shall ensure that all structural timber is suitably stress graded to suit the
application.
b) Stress grading of timber shall only be carried out by companies that are currently registered
under a third party quality assurance scheme operated by any of the certification bodies
approved by the UK Timber Grading Committee.
c) Timber with a basic thickness of less than 150mm and not specified for wet exposure shall be
stress graded at a moisture content not exceeding 20%, and clearly marked ‘Dry’ or ‘KD’ (kiln
dried).
d) Timber graded WET and specified for wet exposure conditions shall be clearly marked as ‘Wet’.
e) Structural timber members, which are cut from larger graded sections, shall be regarded for
acceptance and then appropriately marked according to the new grade.
f) Hardwood shall be stress graded to BS 5756, grade HS or other national equivalent and shall
be marked accordingly. Softwood shall be graded according to BS 4978 or other national
equivalent and be marked accordingly.
g) Preservative Treatment: As Section Z12 and the British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing
Association Commodity Specification C7.
h) Glued laminated timber shall be manufactured to BS EN 386, BS EN 391, BS EN 392 and BS
5268: Part 2 from stress graded timber, which shall be free from active attack by insects or
fungi, and shall have the required properties to suit the structural requirements.
i) Adhesives shall be to BS EN ISO 9665 or to the manufacturer’s specification.
H11.2300 FABRICATION
H11.2301 Fabrication of Walling Systems
a) Unless otherwise specified or agreed, curtain walling shall be fabricated as a unitised system.
b) Fabricate sections to accommodate and interface with work of other adjacent works by means
of rabbets, interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required.
c) Component fastenings shall be concealed throughout, shall be of adequate strength, fabricated
from aluminium or stainless steel and shall be fusion welded where required. Jointing and
intersections of the metal shall be accurately cut and fitted to a tolerance of 1mm in true planes
with adequate concealed fastenings and sealed. Welds shall be ground smooth and flush,
buffed and polished so that they are indistinguishable from surrounding metal.
d) Reinforce mullions with aluminium or stainless steel sections as required. Secure aluminium

rooflight system.
8/06/07
sections with adequate anchors to structure.

e) All gaskets shall be free from all contact and migration stain and compatible with all substrates,
sealants and finishes with which they have contact. Refer to Section Z36.
f) Provide inconspicuous, baffled weepholes to properly vent, and drain system cavities to exterior.
g) Fabricate glazing recess of sufficient depth to cover glass edge-seal. Refer to Section Z25.
H11.2302 Structural Glazing

a) Structural glazing shall only be carried out in the factory. No structural glazing will be permitted
on site, except for replacement of broken or sub-standard glass or for 'come back' work.
b) Primers and cleaners and their application shall be strictly as recommended and approved by
the silicone glazing manufacturer.
c) Identify each curtain wall panel by a number, record the date of assembly, silicone type and
batch, curing time, temperature and humidity within the plant at time of assembly.
d) Refer to Sections Z22 and Z25 and fabricate in accordance with Guideline for European
Technical Approved for Structural Sealant Glazing Systems (SSGS) ETAG No. 002.
H11.2303 Tolerances for Manufacture and Element Fabrication

a) Take into account the required erection tolerances during fabrication and ensure that the
Detailed Design accommodates these. These erection tolerances may impose tighter
fabrication tolerance requirements to ensure that the erection tolerances are achieved.
b) Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly
allowed for in the Detailed Design of the corresponding sub-elements.
H11.2304 Welding Procedures

a) Welding for mild steel shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 15614: Part 1.
b) Welding for stainless steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 1011: Part 3. Remove heat
marks using light abrasives, wire brushing or other suitable means in order to match specified
finish.
c) Welding for aluminium shall be in accordance with BS EN 1011: Part 4.
H11.2305 Tolerances for Manufacture

a) The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
i) Length/Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and
3.0mm above 3000mm of design dimension.
ii) Thickness/Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
b) Panel Flatness
i) The panels shall achieve the flatness criteria stated in clause H11.2306 by provision of
stiffeners as necessary or the acceptable composite build-up. On no account shall the
stiffening or other method of achieving the flatness tolerance be visibly apparent in the
completed works.
ii) The Contractor shall provide visual prototypes and full size samples of the cladding
panels for the Architect’s review and acceptance.
H11.2306 Tolerances for Component Assembly

a) Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly
b) Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
i) Level of horizontal members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
ii) Plumb of vertical members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
iii) Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the
lesser of ±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimension.
iv) Bow: The centre section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of

rooflight system.
8/06/07
the element.
v) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than 1/1000 or 1.5mm from
a 2m straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
vi) Flatness of panels/framing: Any surface shall not deviate by more than 1/1000 or 1.5mm
from a 2m straightedge placed against it in any direction.
vii) Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at
either end of the element.
c) All finished metal surfaces shall be free from undulations and irregularities.
i) Twist: ±1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
ii) Line of panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
d) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
H11.2307 Tolerances for Manufacture of GRC Panels

a) Deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions shall not exceed ±1mm.
b) The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the panel shall be more than 0.5mm out of
plane. The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the structural frame to be more than
2mm out of plane.
c) Alignment of joints between panels shall not exceed ±2mm.
d) Alignment of the faces between panels shall not exceed ±1mm.
H11.2308 Manufacture for GRC

a) The panels shall be manufactured off site in controlled factory environment to BS EN 1169.
b) Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of the moulds
immediately before each reuse and of each unit as soon as possible after demoulding. Make
adjustments to moulds as necessary.
c) All hand forming details shall be carried out before the material has achieved its initial set, to
ensure complete bonding.
d) Curing methods shall be adopted to achieve sufficient strength fro the demoulding process.
H11.2309 Timber Generally

a) Note that cross section dimensions of timber shown on the Design Drawings shall be
considered as basic sizes unless otherwise indicated.
b) Reduction to finished sizes of planed/regularised timber shall be carried out to BS EN 1313:
Part 1 for softwood and BS EN 1313: Part 2 for hardwoods.
c) The warping limits set down in BS 4978 for the amount of bow, spring, twist and cup in a piece
of timber shall not be exceeded.
d) Timber members that are damaged, crushed or split beyond the limits of their grading shall not
be used.
e) Scarf joints, finger joints or splice plates shall not be used without the acceptance of the CA.
f) Notches and holes shall be positioned in relation to knots and other defects such that the
strength of members shall not be reduced.
g) When processing treated timber, ensure that as much cutting and machining as possible is
carried out before treatment.
h) All timber, which is sawn along its length, ploughed, thickness planed or otherwise extensively
processed shall be retreated with the original treatment.
i) Minor cuts and drill holes that reveal untreated timber shall be treated with a solution
recommended for the purpose.
H11.2400 FINISHES
H11.2401 Colours
a) Colours to be to RAL colours or anodising colours and specified by the Architect. PVDF and

rooflight system.
8/06/07
polyester powder coatings. Colours to be determined on the basis of samples provided for
b) All finishes shall be of sufficiently durable quality to suit the prevailing environmental conditions
including wind-blown sand. Refer to Section Z31 for polyester powder coatings, Section Z32
for anodising and Section Z32 for PVDF coatings.
H11.2500 ANCILLARIES
Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding
H11.2501 General
a) Bonding is required between individual sections of cladding, in accordance with BS 6651 and
BS EN 62305: Parts 1-4, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections, both vertically and
horizontally over the whole façade. Bonding between sections shall have a minimum cross
section of 50mm².
b) Bonding between the cladding and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals at no
greater than 10m horizontally and 20m vertically. The first level of bonding to the structural
steelwork shall be at the highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/bolts on the cladding for subsequent connections to be made by the lightning
protection contractor.
d) All straps/connections shall be concealed.
e) ***No straps shall be fixed along copings.***
Fixing Brackets for Blinds
H11.2502 General
a) Fixing brackets shall be provided fixed to the framework as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Brackets shall be compatible with the blinds proposed for incorporation.
c) Some blinds will need to be removed for cleaning and maintenance purposes. Refer to design
drawings.
Cradle Restraints
H11.2503 Cradle Restraint Sockets

a) Include into the façade design the integration of stainless steel sockets provided by the Façade
Access Equipment sub-contractor, to act as cradle lateral restraints as required under BS EN
1808.
b) The locations and type of socket, including their mounting shall be advised by the Façade
Access Equipment sub-contractor.
H11.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
H11.3100 WORKMANSHIP
H11.3101 Generally
a) All works shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,
waves, or damage of any nature.
b) Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
c) The glazing works shall be set out such that all framing members are installed in the correct
position, within tolerance, and in the correct relationship to the building structure.
d) All fixing bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
e) Materials shall be kept dry until fixed.
f) Acceptance shall be obtained from the Architect before drilling or cutting parts of the structure,
other than where shown on the Working Drawings.
g) Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means shall be used to prevent bi-metallic
corrosion between dissimilar metals.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
h) Bars shall be set out at evenly spaced centres, straight, parallel and truly aligned with other
features where shown on the Working Drawings.
i) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all
junctions.
j) Ensure that all interfacing requirements relating to fixings are provided. Liaise with the primary
structural steelwork/ concrete sub-contractor in due time prior to fabrication of structural
steelwork/ concrete to ensure that fixing holes, brackets, lugs, etc. are provided in correct
locations to agreed tolerances suitable for fixing curtain walling system as required.
k) Ensure that any remedial works are carried out where damage to structural steelwork finishes or
corrosion protection occurs.
l) Ensure that all interface requirements are provided relating to lightning protection and earth
bonding.
m) Ensure that all interfaces with roof covering systems and associated flashings are
accommodated as indicated on the Design Drawings.
n) Ensure that interfaces with internal bulkhead ceiling linings are accommodated.
o) Ensure that all interfaces with internal partitions and floor slabs are accommodated including
requirements for providing continuity of fire and acoustic separation as required.
H11.3102 Blinds Generally
a) Install blinds to minimise the light leakage through the installation in the closed position.
b) Assemble the blinds completely in the fabrication shop prior to delivery to Site. Test each blind
for proper performance prior to packaging.
c) Secure the blinds with appropriate fixing brackets to withstand all operating forces. Accurately
level the head rail to ensure that the blinds hang vertically or parallel to the walls/ mullions, etc.
which require tolerances.
d) Adjust to provide an equally spaced, vertical and level system. Adjust the lift wires/ tapes to
ensure that the Blinds are parallel in the raised and halfway position.
e) Adjust the installation to ensure that the blinds hang correctly and operate smoothly with edges
aligned and correctly spaced. When operated, the Blinds must stop at the open, closed and
predetermined intermediate position with their bottom edges aligned and parallel to the floor.
f) Store installed blinds/ shades in their fully retracted position to avoid damage and accumulation
of dust and dirt until Practical Completion.
g) Retain the protective covering in position, for as long as is practicable. Each individual blind
shall be signed off as in working order with the Architect.
H11.3103 Quality of GRC Finishes

a) The panel finishes shall be uniform in colour, texture and appearance, unless specified
otherwise.
b) Panel finish shall match the agreed Control Samples. Disregard and replace any units that do
not appear identical to the accepted samples.
H11.3104 Timber Workmanship Generally

a) The installation shall comply with BS 8000: Part 5.
b) When instructed by the CA, timber sections shall be tested with an approved electrical
moisture meter, which shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
i) 5% of material shall be tested but not less than ten lengths of each cross section shall be
tested at the centre of the length.
ii) 90% of values given shall be within the specified range. All results shall be provided to
the CA in writing.
c) Timber:
i) Shall be kept dry and not subjected to overstress, distortion or disfigurement of sections
or components during transit, storage, lifting, erection or fixing.
ii) All timber for external use shall be kept so that it meets the requirements of i) above but

rooflight system.
8/06/07
also so that its moisture content does not change significantly from when it was graded
‘WET’.
iii) Timber and components shall be stored under cover, clear of the ground and with good
ventilation. Level bearers on a dry firm base shall provide support at regular intervals. Any
pile shall be opened to ensure free movement of air through the stack.
iv) The sequence of construction shall be arranged so that the timber is protected prior to
use in the construction, while it is being mounted in the construction and subsequently
maintained.
v) Trussed rafters shall be kept vertically during handling and storage.
d) All exposed end grains shall be sealed with a suitable clear end grain seal before delivery to the
Site.
e) Pelletting: Screw heads shall be countersunk 6mm below the timber surface and grain-matched
pellets not less than 6mm thicker shall be glued into place. Pellets shall be cut from matching
timber.
f) Temporary bracing shall be provided as necessary to maintain structural timber components in
position and to ensure complete stability during construction.
H11.3200 TOLERANCES
H11.3201 Installation
a) The works shall be installed to meet the tolerances as specified below. These tolerances shall
be adhered to for the works in its completed installed condition. Make due allowance for any
structural movements and deviations including deformations caused by the installation itself
due, for example, to the effect of the self-weight of the cladding on its supporting structure. In
this respect, refer to the Project Common Movement and Tolerances Report document. In the
case of any doubt seek further advice from the Project Structural Engineer regarding the
deformations which shall be allowed for in the Detailed Design and installation.
b) Level: Set out following horizontal bands, each corner of the panel shall be placed to within
2mm of the design dimension to the corresponding Horizontal Location Reference Plane.
Further, the bottom edge of each cladding panel, based on the mean level of the respective
bottom corners, shall be placed to within ±1mm of the design dimensions from the
corresponding Location Reference Plane. Unless otherwise stated, the Location Reference
Plane shall be defined as the horizontal plane through the mean level of the tops of the primary
edge beam elements or slab edge to which each horizontal cladding panel band is
placed/suspended.
c) Plumbness: Each panel’s reference face (exterior face for external cladding, visible face for
single side exposure panels) shall be installed such that the respective offset distances of the
top and bottom edges of the panel to an adjacent true vertical line (plumbline) do not differ by
more than 2mm or 0.1% of the height of the panel, whichever is less.
d) Panel Plan Alignment: The panels shall be installed such that the distances of the respective
corners of the reference face to the cladding Location Reference Plane are within 3mm of the
Design Dimension and do not differ from each other by more than 2mm. This applies both to the
top and bottom edges of each panel. Unless otherwise stated, the Vertical Location Reference
Plane shall be defined as the mean plane of the edges of the primary edge beams or slab
edges corresponding to top and bottom widths of each cladding panel.
e) Transom alignment: The misalignment between the edge of a cladding panel and its supporting
transom shall not exceed 1mm.
f) Joints: Where adjacent elements are designed to have edges, lines or surfaces which line
through their common joint, the maximum allowed step across the joint is the lesser of ±2mm or
±10% of the joint width in any direction.
g) The works shall be erected plumb and in proper alignment and relation to established lines and
grades as shown on the Working Drawings. The erected system shall present true and accurate
lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be limited to long wave
formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not exceeding
1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from an optical or
laser reference line.
h) All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
the Architect. Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and
rooflight system.
8/06/07
cross-checking with adjacent trades and elements, to satisfy the accuracy requirements, shall
be submitted to the Architect. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the
Architect, or his representative, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
for the correctness thereof.
i) Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the Architect's discretion,
provided they are agreed in advance of the manufacture of components.
j) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
H11.3202 Site Erection

a) Horizontal Plan Position: For any element at any level whose position is defined in relation to a
primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the Design Dimension to that
reference grid is ±2mm.
b) Where a series of elements are arranged in an array of two or more, the maximum allowed
deviation of the horizontal distance between any two adjacent elements is ±2mm from the
corresponding Design Dimension.
c) Verticality: For any element connecting two or more reference levels, the maximum allowed
deviation of the relative plan position in any direction of that element at any two successive
levels is ±2mm from the corresponding Design Dimension.
d) Planarity: Any element or group of elements whose position is defined from a reference plane
shall not deviate from the Design Dimension of the reference plane by more than ±2mm
measuring perpendicular to the defined plane.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
L10 LOUVRES ..............................................................................................................3
L10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
L10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

L10.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 3

Louvres.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
L10.1201 Type LVR-01 Metal Louvres........................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1203 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door........................................................................................................................................................3
Rooflights ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
L10.1205 Type RFL-03A Roofglazing System ..........................................................................................................................................3
L10.1204 Type RFL-03C Glass Lens Rooflights......................................................................................................................................4
L10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

L10.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1306 Benchmarks .....................................................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
L10.1307 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

Structural .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
L10.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1402 Deflections .......................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1403 Wind Loads......................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1404 Inertial Loads ...................................................................................................................................................................................5
Environmental .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
L10.1405 Thermal Movement.........................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1406 Moisture Movement .......................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1407 Atmospheric Conditions...............................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1413 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ..........................................................................................................................6
L10.1414 Local Factors ...................................................................................................................................................................................6
Acoustic ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
L10.1415 Acoustic Performance Requirements .......................................................................................................................................6
Fire ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
L10.1416 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1417 Surface Spread of Flame..............................................................................................................................................................6
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
L10.1419 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1421 Impact and Abrasion Resistance................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1422 Demountability.................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................. 6
L10.2100 SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 7

Louvres.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
L10.2101 Aluminium Louvres .........................................................................................................................................................................7
L10.2102 Louvred Doors.................................................................................................................................................................................7
Rooflights ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
L10.2103 Rooflights .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
L10.2200 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 7

Metalwork ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
L10.2201 Aluminium .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
L10.2202 Mild Steel..........................................................................................................................................................................................7
Sealants and Gaskets ................................................................................................................................................................... 7
L10.2203 Sealants ............................................................................................................................................................................................7
L10.2204 Gaskets.............................................................................................................................................................................................8
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and L10/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Support Structure/ Fixings........................................................................................................................................................... 8

L10.2205 Support Structure ..........................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2206 Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2300 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................... 8

L10.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture .........................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly.......................................................................................................................................8
L10.2400 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTH BONDING .................................................. 9

L10.2401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................9
L10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 9
L10.3100 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 9

L10.3101 General Requirements ..................................................................................................................................................................9

rooflight system.
8/06/07
L10 LOUVRES
L10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
L10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

L10.1101 Descriptive Works
Specific design and performance requirements are as defined in the particular trade sections.
Specification.
d) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such material,
product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the CA’s design intent only. The
Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other confirmed as
acceptable by the CA in writing, but shall remain fully responsible for the Detailed Design and
performance of the works.
L10.1102 Scope of Works

a) Louvre systems.
b) Louvred doors and ironmongery.
c) Rooflights including finished precast concrete domed openings.
L10.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
L10.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

Louvres
L10.1201 Type LVR-01 Metal Louvres

Custom made aluminium louvred wall system and framing with sand traps and incorporating louvred
door. Provide blanking panels as required. Refer to the M&E specification for details of ventilation
requirements/blanking panels. The external louvres to comprise extruded aluminium blades at 45
degree angle including insect/vermin mesh behind. Finish to louvres to be colour anodised. Anodising
colour to be advised.
L10.1202 Type LVR-02 Metal Louvres
Same as LVR-01 but louvers to have no sand traps.
L10.1203 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door

Aluminium louvred door with ironmongery integral to LVR-01 or LVR-02
Rooflights
L10.1205 Type RFL-03A Roofglazing System

Double glazed (curved profile) rooflights set into RC vaulted roof system as follows: Refer to the
Structural Engineer’s Specification for the RC vaulted Structure:
a) Thermally broken aluminium framing supporting glazed units with structural silicone and/or

rooflight system.
8/06/07
gaskets as required. Colours to be confirmed by CA.

b) Double glazed glass (type GL-12).
c) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated. Non-
d) Rooflights to be set into precast concrete vaulted/domed openings in concrete roof with
upstands, bracketry and all fixings as required and set flush with the roof finish as shown on the
Design Drawings.
e) Precast concrete vaulted/domed roof within main roof structure as indicated on the design
drawings and in accordance with the structural engineers documentation with external
insulation with render over.
f) Refer to section M21 for external insulation and render and section E50 for precast concrete.
L10.1204 Type RFL-03C Glass Lens Rooflights

Coloured Glass lenses inserted into the RC vaulted roof system. Refer to the Structural Engineer’s
Specification for the RC vaulted Structure:
a) Thermally broken aluminium framing supporting glazed units with structural silicone and/or
gaskets as required. Colours to be confirmed by CA.
b) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated. Non-
c) Rooflights to be set into precast concrete vaulted/domed openings in concrete roof with
upstands, bracketry and all fixings as required and set flush with the roof finish as shown on the
Design Drawings.
d) Precast concrete vaulted/domed roof within main roof structure as indicated on the design
drawings and in accordance with the structural engineers documentation with external mineral
wool insulation with render over.
e) Refer to section M21 for external insulation and render and section E50 for precast concrete.
L10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
L10.1301 Tender Response

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Free area performance and dynamic air flow data for all louvre systems proposed.
ii) Samples where specified.
iii) List of Tests included.
iv) QA/QC programme.
v) List of proposed Shop Drawings.
vi) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
vii) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc.
viii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
L10.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Provide 4 samples of the following, including relevant trade literature and technical specifications,
shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
a) Samples of framing and louvre blade minimum 300mm long for each Type.
b) Samples of metal finishes proposed.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) Typical ironmongery components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating
handle, hinge and locking device.
L10.1303 Post Contract Samples

In accordance with Section A.4000, provide 4 post contract samples of the following shall be
provided:
a) Samples of framing and louvre blade minimum 300mm long for each Type.
b) Samples of metal finishes proposed.
c) Typical ironmongery components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating
handle, hinge and locking device.
L10.1304 Mock-ups
A mock-up shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
An arrangement of components and systems forming a visual and conceptual model of the works
including interfaces with adjacent components and structure.
L10.1305 Prototypes
Subject to previous testing results being provided. Provides prototypes for testing if required.
L10.1306 Benchmarks
The following quality benchmark shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
The first fully installed and completed part of the works.
Testing
L10.1307 Test Requirements

Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
L10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Comply with the general performance of Section A of the Specification and the following specific
performance requirements.
Structural
L10.1401 General
When calculating loads the worst combinations shall be considered, taking account of the fact that
the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
L10.1402 Deflections
The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to dead and live loads shall not
exceed 1/500 of the span or 3mm, whichever is the lesser.
L10.1403 Wind Loads

Generally: The works shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of
wind loads. The works shall not depart from fixings under the design wind loads.
L10.1404 Inertial Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/deceleration of moving sections including opening doors.
Environmental
L10.1405 Thermal Movement

a) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and
minimum surface temperatures occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and
permanent conditions envisaged for the works.
b) The service temperature range for components of the works shall be taken as 0°C and to
80°C.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
L10.1406 Moisture Movement

The works shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the specified
performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of their components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
b) Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by freezing.
L10.1407 Atmospheric Conditions

All works shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
L10.1413 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance

Louvres to provide class A rain defence to comply with the HEVAC standard and to incorporate sand
traps and insect mesh.
L10.1414 Local Factors

a) Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the
location shall be selected.
b) An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the Contract. More appropriate
materials shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
Acoustic
L10.1415 Acoustic Performance Requirements

Refer to the Acoustic Consultant’s documentation.
Fire
L10.1416 General
All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
L10.1417 Surface Spread of Flame

All materials used shall achieve a Class 0 classification when tested in accordance with BS 476:
Parts 6 and 7 to comply with the requirements of the Fire Strategy documentation.
Durability
L10.1419 General
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the works, as stated in the
Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
L10.1421 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

a) The works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently
hard to resist all reasonable impacts and the effects of wind blown sand.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out on all works assemblies in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 8200. Tests shall conform to category B requirements.
c) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall be submitted to the CA.
L10.1422 Demountability
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance.
b) The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of these, or
adjacent, works.
L10.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

rooflight system.
8/06/07
L10.2100 SYSTEMS
Louvres
L10.2101 Aluminium Louvres

a) Single bank shallow section louvre system integrated into the cladding system as required as
shown on the Design Drawings. Louvres to comprise extruded aluminium profiles to satisfy the
design intent as shown on the Design Drawings with colour anodised finish. Refer to Section
Z11.
b) Aluminium louvre blades shall comprise single piece extrusions of profile depth/pitch as
indicated on the Design Drawings with aluminium framing, end capping pieces, connectors and
support bracketry as required for fixing back to the curtain wall mullions.
c) The aluminium extrusions shall be to BS EN 573: Parts 1-3, BS EN 515 and BS EN 755: Parts
1-9.
d) Refer to the M&E specification for requirements for blanking panels, dynamic performance,
pressure drop and free area requirements for all louvers.
e) Provide blanking plates to all non-active louvres. Blanking plates to be PVF4 finished matt black.
Refer to the M&E Specification and Drawings for requirements for blanking panels.
L10.2102 Louvred Doors

a) Louvred doors to comprise material and finish to match the louvre system.
b) Ironmongery to be discreet stainless steel (grade 1.4401).
c) Doors to be manually operated with lock mechanism.
Rooflights
L10.2103 Rooflights
a) Glass lenses: As shown on the Design Drawings in the required sizes.
b) Colour of glass to be confirmed.
c) Glass lenses to be embedded in the RC/precast concrete vault construction.
d) Formwork for precast concrete: The location of all pour lines and embedded accessories shall
be to the acceptance of the Architect. Forms shall be of adequate thickness and braces shall
be stiffened, anchored and aligned to produce works within required dimensional tolerances.
e) Embedded Accessories: Anchors, inserts, lifting devices and other accessories that are to be
embedded in the precast units shall be furnished and installed in accordance with an accepted
Detail Drawing. Embedded items shall be accurately positioned in their design location and
shall have sufficient anchorage and embedment to satisfy design requirements.
f) Units shall not be removed from the forms until units develop sufficient strength to prevent
damage to the units from overstress or chipping.
L10.2200 MATERIALS
Metalwork
L10.2201 Aluminium
a) Aluminium sheeting to be of thickness to suit performance criteria. Unless specified otherwise,
aluminium sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick and satisfy the requirements of BS EN
485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4.
b) Refer also to Section Z11.
L10.2202 Mild Steel

a) All mild steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 1, unless stated otherwise.
b) Refer also to Sections Z11 and Z30.
Sealants and Gaskets
L10.2203 Sealants
Refer to Section Z22.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
L10.2204 Gaskets
a) Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone. The
colour of all gaskets shall be black.
b) Refer to Section Z36.
Support Structure/ Fixings
L10.2205 Support Structure

Provide a structural steel support structure, as necessary, having due regard for any requirements in
excess of structural steel indicated on the Structural Engineer's Drawings and also any requirements
indicated on the Design Drawings. The structural steelwork shall comply with the Structural
Engineer's Steelwork Specification, including protective coatings.
L10.2206 Fixings
Fixing components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of the
District Surveyor/ Building Control Officer/Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall
be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements. Select suitable components and fixings in accordance with the following:
a) Fixing components for the works shall comprise stainless steel components of high grade
austenitic stainless steel exterior quality to BS EN 10088, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10087, BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10250: Part 4 and BS EN ISO 9445 and BS
8298.
b) Any sheet mild steel, cleats, angles, fixing brackets, etc. used in the fixing assemblies shall
comply with BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10210 and BS EN 10025: Parts 1-4 and 6 and
rolled sections shall be used wherever practicable or appropriate. Steel sections used shall be
hot-dip galvanised to the requirements of BS EN ISO 1461 after all cutting, drilling of holes and
welding has been completed.
c) All non-visible supporting aluminium sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill
finished aluminium shall not be used. Aluminium sub-constructions shall be separated from
concrete by bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to BS EN
10088 may be used in lieu of aluminium for any supporting sub-constructions.
d) Fixing bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be manufactured from austenitic stainless steel
complying with BS EN ISO 3506: Parts 1 and 2. All screw fixings and attachments shall be
secured against vibrating loose.
L10.2300 FABRICATION
L10.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture
b) The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
i) Length/Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and
3.0mm above 3000mm of design dimension.
ii) Thickness/Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
L10.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly

b) Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
i) Level of horizontal members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
ii) Plumb of vertical members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
iii) Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the
lesser of ±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimension.
iv) Bow: The centre section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of
the element.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
v) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2m
straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
vi) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2m straightedge
placed against it in any direction.
vii) Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at
either end of the element.
c) All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities.
i) Twist: ±1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
ii) Line of panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
d) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
L10.2400 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTH BONDING

L10.2401 General
a) Bonding to metal components shall be provided in accordance with BS 6651 and BS EN
62305: Parts 1-4, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections, both vertically and
horizontally over the whole façade. Bonding between sections shall have a minimum cross
section of 50mm². Any bolts used for bonding shall be of a minimum size of M10.
b) Bonding to structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals at no greater than 10m
horizontally and 20m vertically. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at
the highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/bolts for subsequent connection.
d) All straps/connections shall be concealed.
e) No straps shall be fixed along copings.
L10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
L10.3100 WORKMANSHIP
L10.3101 General Requirements
a) The works shall be erected plumb (or at the angles prescribed) and true in proper alignment
and relation to established lines and grids as shown on the Shop Drawings. The erected system
shall present true and accurate lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality
shall be limited to long wave formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of
exchange not exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be
measured from a laser reference line.
b) Joints between panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by
more than ±2mm or 10% of the joint width whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be
equally distributed with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed
2mm.
c) Level: The works shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the
same locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
d) Plumbness: The works shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 3mm from
its theoretical vertical/diagonal plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any
panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane shall be within ±2mm of the theoretical
plane position.
e) A method statement detailing proposals to achieve the specified tolerances shall be submitted
with the Tender. This shall demonstrate a clear understanding of the construction programme,
the effects of the building structure and construction method and the fabrication method of the
panels.
f) Sufficient analysis of the erection sequence shall be undertaken to ensure that the installation
tolerances stated above shall be met to the acceptance of the CA.
g) Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional
setting-out and crosschecking with adjacent trades and elements to satisfy the accuracy
requirements shall be submitted to the CA. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or

rooflight system.
8/06/07
level by the CA, or his representative, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness thereof.
h) Alternative Tolerances: Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the CA's
discretion, provided they are agreed in advance of manufacture of components.
i) The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in manufacture of the works in order to
accommodate manufacturing tolerances of interfacing elements.
j) The tolerances stated herein shall be adhered to. No revisions to the tolerances to cater for
inadequate control shall be permitted.
k) Full details shall be submitted to the CA for review of the proposed methods for achieving and
constantly monitoring the fabrication tolerances during all stages of the work. Detailed records
of the constant control and tolerances achieved shall be submitted to the CA.
l) The works, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting and shall be strictly rigid,
firm, free from vibration, knocking, rattles, squeaks and other noises when subject to the worst
combination of environmental conditions and wind loads.
m) All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
the CA.
n) No rainwater ponding shall be permitted on any element of the works.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
M21 INSULATION WITH RENDERED FINISH .........................................................3
M21.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
M21.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

M21.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
M21.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
M21.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
M21.1200 SYSTEM TYPES ................................................................................................................ 3

M21.1201 Type REN-05 Rendered External Insulation System for vaulted/domed rooflight openings for ..............................3
RFL-03A and RFL-03C....................................................................................................................................................................
M21.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 3

M21.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................3
M21.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1306 Quality Benchmarks.......................................................................................................................................................................4
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
M21.1307 Pull-out Test(s) on Fixing Pins and Adhesive(s).....................................................................................................................4
M21.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 4

Structural .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
M21.1401 Integrity..............................................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1402 Impact Loading ...............................................................................................................................................................................4
M21.1403 Wind Loads......................................................................................................................................................................................5
Environmental .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
M21.1404 Vapour Permeability.......................................................................................................................................................................5
M21.1405 Thermal Performance ....................................................................................................................................................................5
Fire ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
M21.1406 Surface Spread of Flame..............................................................................................................................................................5
M21.2000 SYSTEMS AND MATERIALS ............................................................................... 5
M21.2100 SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 5

M21.2101 Type REN-05 Rendered External Wall Insulation System...................................................................................................5
M21.2200 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 5

M21.2201 Manufacturers..................................................................................................................................................................................5
M21.2202 Adhesive ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5
M21.2203 Insulation for Render......................................................................................................................................................................5
M21.2204 Reinforcing Coat ............................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2205 Reinforcement .................................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2206 Vapour Retarders ...........................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2207 Sealants ............................................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2208 Beads/Trims.....................................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2300 FINISHES ............................................................................................................................ 6

M21.2301 Finish Requirements ......................................................................................................................................................................6
M21.2302 Uniformity of Colour and Texture................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 7
M21.3100 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 7

M21.3101 Generally...........................................................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3102 Job Conditions ................................................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3103 Adverse Weather............................................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3104 Condition of Backgrounds...........................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3105 Preparation of Backgrounds........................................................................................................................................................7
M21.3106 Render Thickness Gauges ..........................................................................................................................................................7
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and M21/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
M21.3107 Union with Dissimilar Materials ...................................................................................................................................................7

M21.3108 Drying Out........................................................................................................................................................................................8
M21.3109 Construction/Movement Joints ...................................................................................................................................................8
M21.3110 Supports for Services/Fittings ....................................................................................................................................................8
M21.3111 Sealant Joints ..................................................................................................................................................................................8
M21.3112 Cleanliness.......................................................................................................................................................................................8
M21.3113 Inspection of Completed Installation.........................................................................................................................................8

rooflight system.
8/06/07
M21 INSULATION WITH RENDERED FINISH

M21.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
M21.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

M21.1101 Descriptive Works
sections.
Specification.
d) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such
M21.1102 Scope of Works
particular requirements with respect to the works, which include the following:
a) External insulation and render finish.
M21.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
M21.1200 SYSTEM TYPES

M21.1201 Type REN-05 Rendered External Insulation System for vaulted/domed rooflight openings for
RFL-03A and RFL-03C.

Acrylic through-coloured render over insulation with waterproof membrane.
M21.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
M21.1301 Tender Response

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Samples where specified.
ii) List of Tests included.
iii) QA/QC programme.
iv) List of proposed Working Drawings.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
v) Summary of deviations from the Specification.

vi) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems.
vii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
M21.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Provide sample(s) of all accessories and materials to be used in the system, including:
a) Insulation with rendered finish with colour and texture, as advised by the Architect.
b) Movement joints.
c) Sealants.
d) Steel angular profiles.
M21.1303 Post Contract Samples

Provide samples representing the range of variation in appearance and obtain acceptance of
appearance before placing orders with suppliers as follows:
a) Insulation with rendered finish with colour and texture, as advised by the Architect.
b) Movement joints.
c) Sealants.
d) Steel angular profiles.
M21.1304 Mock-ups
Not required.
M21.1305 Prototypes
Not required.
M21.1306 Quality Benchmarks

Provide a quality benchmark being part of the finished work, in agreed location(s) in accordance with
Section A.4000 as follows:
a) An area of rendering to be agreed, with the Architect.
Testing
M21.1307 Pull-out Test(s) on Fixing Pins and Adhesive(s)

a) Pull-out test(s) shall be carried out on Site to prove the suitability of the structural background
and determine the size and number of fixings required and/or type of adhesive.
b) Give advance notice of testing to allow Architect the opportunity to be present.
M21.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

requirements.
Structural
M21.1401 Integrity
The installation shall be:
a) Weathertight under all anticipated conditions.
b) Capable of resisting all dead loads, design live loads, imposed loads from maintenance access,
including impact and wind loads, and accommodate all thermal movements without damage.
c) The flat plane should be laid to falls suitable for the local conditions to allow rainwater run off.
M21.1402 Impact Loading

The finished system shall have the following impact resistance:
a) Areas that are required to be walked on for access to clean/maintain roof glazing/lens’s shall

rooflight system.
8/06/07
have suitable reinforcement mesh, additional coats/layers of render and an insulation type with
suitable compressive strength so as not to deflect, crack or damage the render finish in any way
when walked on.
b) All other areas: 15 Nm.
M21.1403 Wind Loads

The works system shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, the effects of wind
loads as Section A and in compliance with the recommendations of BS 6399.
Environmental
M21.1404 Vapour Permeability

The vapour permeability of the system shall be not less than that of the construction to which it is
applied.
M21.1405 Thermal Performance

Thermal transmittance (U-value): The construction (assembly of work) shall provide an average U-
value of ***0.33***W/m²K or better.
Fire
M21.1406 Surface Spread of Flame

Fire rating: Class 0 surface spread of flame as defined by the Building Regulations.
M21.2000 SYSTEMS AND MATERIALS
M21.2100 SYSTEMS
M21.2101 Type REN-05 Rendered External Wall Insulation System
Acrylic through-coloured render over insulation with waterproof membrane.
a) External Insulation and Render Finish System shall be Agrément certified or acceptable
equivalent.
b) Structural background:
i) Primary: Precast concrete.
ii) Secondary: Framework to receive the works system shall be to the manufacturer’s details.
c) Locate construction/ movement/ expansion joints where indicated on the Design Drawings or
where recommended by the manufacturer. All joints to be shown on the Working Drawings.
M21.2200 MATERIALS
M21.2201 Manufacturers
Materials are specified by performance requirements and general description of product. The
Architect may consider substitutions of products specified, provided the procedures set forth for
substitutions are followed. The Architect at his discretion may reject any material, which in his/her
opinion or requirement, will not produce the acceptable quality of work and/or specified herein.
M21.2202 Adhesive
a) Mineralic microsilicate based adhesive mixed with clean water, as recommended in writing by
the manufacturer.
Or
b) Fibre reinforced, 100% acrylic based adhesive mixed with clean water and ordinary Portland
cement additive(s), as recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
M21.2203 Insulation for Render

a) Non-combustible, inorganic, mineral fibre type insulation to comply with the performance
requirements. Insulation to be suited to the purpose and to achieve the required U-values.
i) Insulation material shall be in accordance with BS EN 13162 and in accordance with the
Specification.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Thermal conductivity (k-value): 0.037 W/mK.

iii) Flame retardant: Class O, BS 476.
b) Dimensional tolerances shall be as follows:
i) Length or width: ± 1mm.
ii) Squareness: Maximum 1mm over the entire length of the board.
iii) Thickness: ± 0.5mm.
iv) Deflection: Maximum 0.5mm.
c) Thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings, minimum 20mm.
d) Maximum size of non-combustible mineral wool insulation boards shall not exceed 1000mm x
500mm.
e) The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapour.
f) The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or in situ during
the life of the works.
g) Insulation shall be LPCB certified to LPS 1181.
h) Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five. Refer also to Section A.6000 of the
Specification.
i) Insulation shall be selected to meet the recommendations of ‘The Green Guide to Specification’
and shall have a minimal environmental impact when assessed using BREEAM criteria.
j) The selected insulation shall comply with all relevant British Standards and be BBA certified.
M21.2204 Reinforcing Coat

Render - A ready mixed, non-cementitious base coat, 100% acrylic copolymer emulsion based, water
resistant, vapour permeable, glass fibre reinforced, non-capillary action reinforcing coat. May be used
with or without accelerator to control drying time dependent on weather conditions, strictly to the
M21.2205 Reinforcement
a) Reinforcing fibre mesh with symmetrical interfaced glass fibre made from twisted multi-end
strands, styrene butadiene coated to provide a high resistance to alkali attack and
manufactured so as to prevent laminar movement and deformation.
b) Heavy-duty, double standard, interwoven glass fibre mesh styrene butadiene coated, for
application in high traffic, vandal prone and anticipated impact areas.
M21.2206 Vapour Retarders

Where required as recommended, a type approved by the system manufacturer.
M21.2207 Sealants
A type approved by the system manufacturer.
M21.2208 Beads/Trims
Provide and fix all necessary bell casts, stop beads, movement and expansion joint beads, etc.
required to complete the installation.
M21.2300 FINISHES
M21.2301 Finish Requirements
a) The finish shall be one of the manufacturer's exterior ready mixed 100% acrylic resin containing
quartz aggregates or silicone resin based wall coatings or acceptable equivalent.
b) Type, texture, colour and aggregate sizes shall be suitable to give a smooth polished finish or as
sample acceptable to the Architect.
c) Finishes shall be formulated with Dirt Pickup Resistance (D.P.R.) and Proven Mildew
Resistance (PMR) cross linked acrylic technology or equivalent agreed for long-term durability

rooflight system.
8/06/07
and low maintenance.

d) Colour selection: The lightness value of the exterior finish colour to be applied over mineral wool
shall be 20% or greater or agreed equivalent. All synthetic resin finish renders/plasters shall
have maximum light fastness properties.
M21.2302 Uniformity of Colour and Texture

a) Once samples of coatings have been accepted do not change type or proportion of constituent
materials.
b) Ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give consistent and uniform colour and texture.
M21.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
M21.3100 WORKMANSHIP
M21.3101 Generally
a) Installation shall be carried out by the Render System manufacturer or by a contractor approved
by the Render System manufacturer.
b) Under no circumstances shall any of the proprietary insulated render products be altered with
antifreeze, accelerators, rapid binders or any other additives.
M21.3102 Job Conditions

No renders/plasters described shall be applied unless ambient and surface temperatures can be kept
above +5°C during application and drying period. Prior to installation, the wall shall be free of
residual moisture. The stored material shall be protected from frost and strong sunlight. For
installation in temperatures less than +5°C, supplementary heat shall be provided.
M21.3103 Adverse Weather

a) Do not use frozen materials and do not apply materials to frost bound surfaces.
b) Do not apply adhesive, mortar or render when the air temperature is at or below 5 °C on a
falling thermometer or below 3 °C on a rising thermometer, or when the temperature of the air
or wall surface is above 30 °C and the surface is not protected.
c) Maintain temperature of the work above freezing until adhesive/mortar/render has fully
hardened.
d) Protect newly rendered surfaces against rain and snow by covering when precipitation occurs.
e) Replace coatings damaged by rain or frost.
M21.3104 Condition of Backgrounds

Before pre-treatment or application of coatings ensure that backgrounds are structurally sound,
adequately true and level, dry, free from contamination by dirt, dust, efflorescence or other deleterious
substances, and in a suitable condition to receive specified coatings.
M21.3105 Preparation of Backgrounds

Remove efflorescence, dust and other loose material by thoroughly dry brushing. Remove all traces of
paint, dirt and other substances incompatible with adhesive by scrubbing with water containing
detergent and washing off with plenty of clean water. Allow drying before applying coatings unless
specified otherwise.
M21.3106 Render Thickness Gauges

Render thickness gauges shall be used to ensure the specified coating thickness.
M21.3107 Union with Dissimilar Materials

The following measures shall be employed when the proprietary insulated render system meets an
adjoining material:
a) Insulation board shall be cut back between 2-4mm from the adjoining material.
b) A proprietary pre-compressed neoprene based expandable waterproofing tape shall be
introduced to the edge of the insulation board in accordance with the manufacturer's written
product data.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
M21.3108 Drying Out

a) Allow primer coats and undercoats to dry out thoroughly before applying subsequent coats.
b) Take all necessary precautions to prevent newly rendered surfaces from drying out too rapidly.
M21.3109 Construction/Movement Joints

Form joints accurately to detail and in locations shown on the drawings. If modifications to any joint
location or design are necessary on Site, agree revisions with the Architect before proceeding.
M21.3110 Supports for Services/Fittings

a) Provide secure supports for soil and rainwater pipe brackets and the like in locations shown on
drawings.
b) Type as recommended by the system manufacturer.
M21.3111 Sealant Joints

a) Location(s): Refer to the Design Drawings.
i) At abutting works.
ii) At rooflight and lens interfaces.
b) Sealant: Type as recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
c) Form in accordance with the system manufacturer’s written recommendations using any
necessary joint filler, backing strips, etc.
M21.3112 Cleanliness
Carefully protect all existing work and approaches using suitable boards, sheets, etc. Clean off any
droppings from finished work immediately.
M21.3113 Inspection of Completed Installation

As soon as possible after completion of the work and before removing scaffolding, carry out an
inspection with the Architect to identify any defects.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z10 JOINERY.................................................................................................................2
Z10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION ............................................... 2
Z10.2100 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION ................................................................................... 2

Z10.2101 Timber/Wood ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2102 Fabrication Generally.....................................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2200 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 2

Z10.2201 Cross-sectional Dimensions .......................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2202 Preservative Treated Timber........................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2203 Moisture Content............................................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2204 Bonded Decorative Laminates....................................................................................................................................................2
Z10.2205 Wood Veneers ................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z10.2206 Finishing and Protecting...............................................................................................................................................................3
Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and Z10/1 Foster and Partners

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z10 JOINERY
Z10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION
Z10.2100 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

Z10.2101 Timber/Wood
a) The dimensions shown in the Design Drawings and/or Shop Drawings of timber sub-frames,
material thicknesses, the dimensions of mullions, transoms, etc. shall be maintained within
tolerances agreed with the CA.
b) All materials and components shall be durable and comply with the minimum standards set out
in the Specification, together with the relevant British Standards.
c) For each material or component the total quantity shall be obtained from the same supplier or
manufacturer, unless otherwise agreed with the CA.
d) All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength, not only to meet the structural
requirements, but also to eliminate any risk of distortion in the finished surfaces.
e) Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
f) All exposed timber and woodwork shall be painted or sealed prior to receiving the finished
coating system where specified, all in accordance with the relevant British Standards.
Concealed framework for units shall be protected and sealed in all conditions. Any cut edges
shall be treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
Z10.2102 Fabrication Generally

a) Fabricate joinery components to BS 1186: Part 2.
b) Form sections out of the solid when not specified otherwise. Carefully machine timber to
accurate lengths and profiles, free from twist and bowing. After machining, surfaces shall be
smooth and free from tearing, woolliness, chip bruising and other machining defects.
c) Assemble with tight, close fitting joints to produce rigid components free from distortion.
d) Screw heads shall be countersunk not less than 2mm below timber surfaces that will be visible
in completed work. All screws shall have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all
screws into hardwood shall have pilot holes.
Z10.2200 WORKMANSHIP
Z10.2201 Cross-sectional Dimensions
Cross-sectional dimensions of timber shown on the Design Drawings are nominal sizes unless stated
otherwise. Reduction to finished sizes shall be to BS EN 1313: Part 1 for softwoods and BS EN
1313: Part 2 for hardwoods. Deviation from the stated sizes shall not be permitted unless prior
acceptance is given.
Z10.2202 Preservative Treated Timber

a) Carry out as much cutting and machining as possible before treatment.
b) Retreat all timber that is sawn, ploughed, planed or otherwise extensively processed in any way.
c) Treat surfaces exposed by minor cutting and drilling with two flood coats of a solution
recommended for the purpose by the main treatment solution manufacturer.
Z10.2203 Moisture Content

The moisture content of timber and wood based sheets shall be maintained during manufacture and
storage, within the range specified for the component.
Z10.2204 Bonded Decorative Laminates

a) Apply sheets in accordance with 'Recommendations for the fabrication of decorative laminated
sheets' published jointly by the British Plastics Federation and the British Laminated Plastics
Fabricators' Association.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
b) Condition sheets before bonding. Unless specified otherwise, apply to the reverse side of flat
boards a balancing veneer of similar construction to the decorative veneer and from the same
manufacturer.
c) Bond in presses whenever possible.
d) Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, cracks, pimpling,
depressions, glue spill, staining, defects in colour and pattern and the like.
e) All joints exposed to view in the finished work shall be tight butted and true with no lipping.
Chamfer edges at all external angles.
Z10.2205 Wood Veneers

a) Condition core material and veneers before bonding. Unless specified otherwise, apply to the
reverse side of flat boards a balancing veneer with the same moisture and temperature
movement characteristics as the facing veneer.
b) Set out veneers so that features and pattern are aligned and in regular, uniform symmetry unless
specified otherwise. Apply veneers with edges tight butted, no gaps or other open defects and
no lipping.
c) Bond in presses whenever possible.
d) Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions,
glue spill, staining and the like.
e) Sand to a fine, smooth finish free from sanding marks.
Z10.2206 Finishing and Protecting

a) Sand all joinery to give smooth, flat surfaces suitable to receive specified finishes. Arrises shall
be eased unless specified otherwise.
b) Before assembly, seal all end grains for external components with primer or sealer as specified
and allow to dry.
c) Protect completed joinery against damage, dirt, moisture and other deleterious substances.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z11 METALWORK........................................................................................................2
Z11.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z11.2101 Metal Components.........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2102 Mild Steel..........................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2103 Aluminium .........................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2104 Stainless Steel ................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z11.2105 Bronze ...............................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2106 Zinc ....................................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2200 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 4

Z11.2201 Fabrication Generally.....................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2202 Cold Formed Work ........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2203 Adhesive Bonding ..........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2204 Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel ............................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2205 Welding/Brazing Generally..........................................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2206 Brazing ..............................................................................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2207 Finishing Welded/Brazed Joints.................................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2208 Applying Coatings..........................................................................................................................................................................5

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z11 METALWORK
Z11.2100 MATERIALS
Z11.2101 Metal Components
a) The Detailed Design of sections, material thicknesses and the dimensions shown on the Design
Drawings shall be maintained within specified tolerances.
b) All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set out in the
Specification, together with the relevant British Standards.
c) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from the same supplier or
manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the Architect.
d) All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the
Works.
e) All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength, to meet the structural
requirements and eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
f) Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
g) All exposed metalwork shall be finished in accordance with the relevant British Standards.
Unless otherwise specified, concealed items shall be mill finished aluminium in internal
conditions only, or hot dip galvanised steel in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Any cut
edges shall be treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
h) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces. To this end attention is drawn
to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'.
Z11.2102 Mild Steel

a) All mild steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 1, unless stated otherwise.
b) Fabrication of steelwork shall be in accordance with the Specification.
c) Before and after making permanent connections in frames and other structural elements, which
are assembled before delivery to Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
d) Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum and local distortion
rendered negligible in the final fabrication. Corrections, if necessary, shall be undertaken by a
method which has been agreed to by the Architect.
e) No welds other than those shown on the Working Drawings, even for temporary attachments or
repairs, shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the Architect. If welded temporary
connections are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be in
accordance with BS EN 1011: Parts 1 and 2.
f) Vent holes in hollow sections shall be sealed in a manner that shall prevent the ingress of
moisture. The proposed method of achieving this requirement shall be submitted for review by
the Architect.
g) External visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section
steelwork shall be positioned in the works so as to be non-visible.
Z11.2103 Aluminium
a) All extruded aluminium alloy members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade of
aluminium alloy complying with BS EN 754: Parts 3-5 and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9 unless
otherwise specified.
b) Unless specified otherwise, aluminium sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick and satisfy the
requirements of BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4.
c) Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminium shall be used to ensure that
all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of

rooflight system.
8/06/07
aluminium extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final
installation.
d) All aluminium fixing brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
alloy to the requirements of BS EN 515, BS EN 573: Parts 3 and 4, and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9.
If visible, they shall be finished to match the metal panels and framing members.
e) All exposed aluminium shall be protected with low tack adhesive film during construction and
prior to handover.
f) Where aluminium is to be anodised, aluminium sheeting and flat panels shall be manufactured
using alloy grade J57S, or acceptable equivalent, and aluminium extrusions shall be
manufactured using alloy grade 6063, or acceptable equivalent.
g) Aluminium panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same direction.
h) Issue “Die Drawings” to the Architect for review. These shall be considered as Working
Drawings. The “Die Drawings” shall indicate polished surfaces and shape.
i) Aluminium extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not be
acceptable.
j) Aluminium sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling,
warp, abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
Z11.2104 Stainless Steel

a) Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel shall be austenitic and non-magnetic to BS EN
10088. Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant sections of the
Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria
specified for the particular element or components.
b) Stainless steel fasteners, bolts, screws, nuts and other fixings shall be to BS EN ISO 3506:
Parts 1 and 2. The property class of fastenings shall be selected to meet the performance
requirements as specified.
c) Stainless steel shall be produced to meet the minimum dimensional tolerances specified in BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051 and BS EN ISO 9445 as appropriate.
d) Unless otherwise specified, welds to visible areas of stainless steel shall be ground smooth to
achieve a seamless surface. Heat tints shall be removed using light abrasives, pickling paste,
wire brushing or similar to achieve continuity with the specified finish. Areas difficult to access
shall be manually finished if necessary.
e) All welds shall comply with BS EN 1011: Part 3 and the definitions given in BS 499: Part 1 and
Part 1 Supplement. Distortion due to thermal movement shall be minimised using jigs or other
methods as appropriate during welding. Welding methods and consumables shall be chosen as
most appropriate to the type, thickness, shape and location of joints to meet the performance
levels required and have mechanical properties at least equal to the original base metal. In
addition, consumables shall have an equal or superior corrosion resistance to the base metal
being welded. All welding recommendations required to meet other relevant standards as
specified shall also apply. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall comply with BS EN
1600.
f) Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication and
installation of stainless steel elements/materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the simultaneous
presence of any of the following:
i) Tensile stresses.
ii) Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
iii) Aggressive local environmental conditions.
iv) Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion
cracking.
g) Stainless steel castings:
i) Shall comply with BS EN 10283 and BS 3146: Part 2.
ii) Shall be of austenitic stainless steel and the casting alloy shall be determined by the
Contractor to meet the requirements of the Specification but shall be equal or superior to
grade 1.4408 with respect to corrosion resistance.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iii) Shall be manufactured using the lost wax process or such other process as may be
proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect.
iv) Exposed feeder ports and die lines shall not be acceptable in the finished castings.
v) The surface finish of the castings shall be determined by the submission of samples for
review and acceptance by the Architect. Samples once accepted should be the standard
required for all subsequent castings to be used in the works.
vi) The surface roughness of the casting surface prior to any subsequent finishing process
shall be SCRATA A2 (Steel Castings Research and Trade Association) or better.
vii) Make allowance for two post production finishing processes to be utilised. The processes
shall be agreed with the Architect and shall include blast finishes (including bead blasting)
and electropolishing or acid pickling.
h) Stainless steel fixings and support brackets for natural stone cladding shall comply with BS
8298.
i) Stainless steel wire, cold-forged fasteners and similar components shall comply with BS EN
10263: Part 5.
j) Stainless steel for wall ties and other components associated with masonry construction shall
comply with BS 5628: Part 3 and BS EN 845: Part 1.
k) Stainless steel shall be protected where possible using appropriate adhesive film, to the film
l) If stainless steel has not been protected by adhesive film, thoroughly clean prior to presentation
to the Architect for acceptance.
Z11.2105 Bronze
a) Bronze (alloy of copper) shall, where applicable, comply generally with CP 143: Part 12, BS EN
1172 and current good practice as described in the current editions of the Copper
Development Association publications, and as recommended by the copper manufacturers,
unless specified or agreed otherwise.
b) The combination and subsequent reaction of the bronze substrate and the post-applied factory
finish shall achieve the visual requirements of the Architect as produced through sampling. The
finish shall be consistent throughout and shall be patinated using a Brown Bronze Powder
applied with consideration to natural toning or artificial toning in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations to achieve the finish as per the sample.
c) The engraving shall be of the highest standard performed by accredited craftsmen. For size of
characters, dimensions, patterns etc refer to the design drawings.
Z11.2106 Zinc
Zinc-copper-titanium alloy shall be in accordance with BS EN 988. The use of Zinc in fully-supported
roofing shall be in accordance with BS EN 501.
Z11.2201 Fabrication Generally
a) Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with the Design and the
Specification.
b) Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fixed where
moisture may be present or occur.
c) Finished components shall be rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.
Moving parts shall move freely and without binding.
d) Unless specified otherwise, mitre corner junctions of identical sections.
Z11.2202 Cold Formed Work

Use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight arrises.
Z11.2203 Adhesive Bonding

a) Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or
chemically.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
b) Use adhesives to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

c) Form bond under pressure.
Z11.2204 Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel

After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
Z11.2205 Welding/Brazing Generally

a) Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined.
b) Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary
attachment.
c) Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.
d) Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in
completed work.
e) Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
f) Metal arc welding shall be to BS EN 1011: Parts 1 and 2, or other methods subject to review
by the Architect.
Z11.2206 Brazing
To BS EN 14324.
Z11.2207 Finishing Welded/Brazed Joints
a) Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
b) Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
Z11.2208 Applying Coatings

a) Apply after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have been drilled, unless otherwise
specified.
b) Before applying coating remove all paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises.
c) Make good all defects that would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z12 PRESERVATIVE/FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT .........................................2
Z12.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION ................................................ 2
Z12.2100 TYPE(S) OF PRESERVATIVE/FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT ................................ 2

Z12.2101 Organic Solvent Preservative Treatment..................................................................................................................................2
Z12.2102 Water Based Microemulsion Preservative Treatment...........................................................................................................2
Z12.2103 Boron Compound Preservative Treatment ..............................................................................................................................2
Z12.2104 Fire Retardant Treatment..............................................................................................................................................................2
Z12.2106 Termite coatings..............................................................................................................................................................................2
Z12.2105 Leach Resistant Fire Retardant Treatment ..............................................................................................................................2
Z12.2200 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z12.2201 Wood Treatments Generally .......................................................................................................................................................2
Z12.2300 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 3

Z12.2301 Generally...........................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z12.2302 BWPDA Commodity Specifications .........................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z12 PRESERVATIVE/FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

Z12.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION
Z12.2100 TYPE(S) OF PRESERVATIVE/FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

Z12.2101 Organic Solvent Preservative Treatment
a) The moisture content of timber at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the component
at the time of delivery. After treatment, the timber shall be surface dry before use.
b) Application: Double vacuum/low pressure.
Z12.2102 Water Based Microemulsion Preservative Treatment

a) Based on copper and organic biocides.
b) The moisture content of the timber at the time of treatment shall be not more than 28%. Allow
timber to dry for at least 14 days before use and until dry.
c) Application: Double vacuum/pressure treated.
Z12.2103 Boron Compound Preservative Treatment

a) Based on boron compounds.
b) The moisture content of the timber at the time of treatment shall be not more than 28%. Allow
timber to dry for at least 14 days before use and until dry.
c) Application: High pressure impregnation.
Z12.2104 Fire Retardant Treatment

a) Timber shall have a flame retardant coating and suitable product for the substrate in
accordance with BS EN 927-1
b) The moisture content at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the timber at the time of
fixing. After treatment, timber shall be dried slowly at temperatures not exceeding 65°C to
minimise degradation and distortion.
c) Application: Vacuum/hydraulic and low pressure.
d) Fire impregnation treatment to be polymer based unless otherwise agreed with the Architect.
e) The contractor is required to provide evidence of compatibility between ‘Dricon’ treated
hardwood and the flame retardant coating proposed.
Z12.2106 Termite coatings

The Contractor shall propose a suitable timber treatment for the prevention of termite attack.
Z12.2105 Leach Resistant Fire Retardant Treatment

a) The moisture content at the time of treatment shall be as specified for the timber at the time of
fixing or:
i) 22% for timbers up to 50mm thick.
ii) 25% for thicker timbers.
b) Application: Vacuum/hydraulic and low pressure.
Z12.2200 MATERIALS
Z12.2201 Wood Treatments Generally
a) No timber shall be used if not recommended in BS 5589 and BS 5268: Part 5.
b) Wood preservative products shall conform to the efficacy requirements of BS EN 599: Part 1
and BS 8417, and shall be treated in accordance with the penetration and retention guidance
given in BS EN 351: Part 1 to give a desired service life in the selected hazard class. Hazard
classes are defined in BS EN 335: Part 1.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z12.2301 Generally
a) Application shall be carried out after cutting and machining, but before assembly, by a
processor licensed by the treatment solution manufacturer for the specified treatment.
b) For each batch of timber a certificate of assurance shall be provided to show that the treatment
has been carried out as specified.
Z12.2302 BWPDA Commodity Specifications

Where specified, BWPDA Commodity Specifications are those defined in the latest edition of the
British Wood Preserving and Damp-proofing Association Manual. Solution strengths and treatment
cycles shall be selected to achieve the service life (if specified) and to suit timber treatability.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z20 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES..........................................................................................2
Z20.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z20.2101 Fixing Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2102 Powder Actuated Fixing Systems ..............................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2103 Screw Fixings ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2104 Packings Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2105 Types of Nail ....................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2106 Masonry Nails ..................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2107 Plugs Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 3
Z20.3100 APPLICATION .................................................................................................................... 3

Z20.3101 Adhesives .........................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3102 Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3103 Powder Actuated Fixing................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3104 Screw Fixings ..................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3105 Packings Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3106 Nail Fixing .........................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3107 Plugs Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................4

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z20 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Z20.2100 MATERIALS
Z20.2101 Fixing Generally
a) All fixings shall be of sufficient strength, appropriate to their location, and are provided at
adequate positions so as to ensure the performance of the elements being attached. The fixings
shall be suitable and used solely for the purposes intended by the manufacturer in order to
satisfy the requirements of the Specification.
b) Unless otherwise specified, observe the following requirements:
i) Durability - fixings shall be selected such that adequate protection against any corrosion
likely to occur in their position of use is provided for the service life specified.
ii) Rigidity - fixings shall be used which are suited to the likely stresses, movements and
vibrations in use.
iii) Appearance - unless otherwise specified, fixings shall not be visible; where fixings are
visible these shall match or suit the items being fixed or comply with the Design Drawings.
iv) Removable items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with hidden screws
and/or bolts, unless otherwise specified.
c) Use fixings that are suitable for their intended purpose and adequate to comply with the
requirements stated in the Specification.
d) All visible bolts, screws, nuts, anchors and other fixings shall be of adequate strength for their
designed purpose and shall, unless specified otherwise, be manufactured from the most
appropriate grade of austenitic stainless steel or other materials as specified. Where specified,
structural steel fixings shall comply with the grades specified.
e) Supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners, fixings, bearings, brackets, etc. necessary for
the safe and proper installation plus associated flashings and closures.
f) All fixings shall conform to all statutory requirements in respect of strength and type.
g) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces. To this end attention is drawn
to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'.
h) Generally, fixings within aluminium framing components shall not be visible, with the exception
of capping pieces fixed to vertical mullions.
i) Visible fixings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support steelwork,
using round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
j) Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanised and effectively weatherproofed to avoid
exposure to the external environment.
k) Provide cast-in channel fixings in concrete and fixings directly made to structural steelwork.
l) All fixings shall be tested in accordance with BS 5080: Parts 1 and 2 by an independent
Testing Authority acceptable to the CA.
Z20.2102 Powder Actuated Fixing Systems

a) Do not use powder actuated fixing systems without acceptance.
b) Tools shall be to BS 4078: Part 2 and Kite mark certified.
c) Fasteners, accessories and consumables shall be types recommended by the tool
manufacturer.
Z20.2103 Screw Fixings

a) Screws: To BS 1210.
b) Washers and screw cups, where specified, shall be of the same material as the screw.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z20.2104 Packings Generally

a) Provide suitable, tight packings at fixing points to take up tolerances and prevent distortion.
b) Use non-compressible, rot-proof, non-corrodible materials positioned adjacent to fixing points.
Z20.2105 Types of Nail

Nails shall be to BS 1202.
Z20.2106 Masonry Nails

Do not use without acceptance.
Z20.2107 Plugs Generally

Use proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and conditions
expected in use.
Z20.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
Z20.3100 APPLICATION
Z20.3101 Adhesives
a) Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound, unfrozen and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and
materials recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
b) Surfaces shall be sufficiently smooth and even to suit the gap-filling and bonding characteristics
of the adhesive. Prepare as necessary.
c) Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers’ and statutory requirements for storage and
safe usage of adhesives.
d) No adhesives shall be used in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum shelf life or open-pot time periods.
e) Adhesives shall be applied using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correct
coverage. Bring surfaces together within the recommended time period and apply pressure
evenly over the full area of contact surfaces to ensure full bonding.
f) Surplus adhesive shall be removed using methods and materials recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer and without damage to affected surfaces.
g) Adhesives and sealants with a low VOC content in line with (SCAQMD) rule #1168.
Z20.3102 Fixings
a) Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting for
anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor bolts
and fixings where necessary.
b) The method of fixing shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fixings.
c) Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the CA.
d) Fasteners shall be installed with a co-ordinated purpose design tooling system that
incorporates a mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates
perpendicular installation. The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site
instruction in the use of the fastener installation tooling system.
e) All fixings shall comply with Section 2 of Approved Document A of the Building Regulations and
any subsequent amendments thereto.
f) Submit QA/QC procedures for inspection of fixings to the CA to include, but not be limited to,
checking each fixing for correct torques, depth of mortices, alignment, etc.
g) Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
Z20.3103 Powder Actuated Fixing

a) Tools shall be used in accordance with BS 4078: Part 1. Operatives shall be trained and
certified as competent by the Contractor.
b) Ensure that operatives take full precautions against injury to themselves and others.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
c) Remove all unspent cartridges from the Site when no longer required.
d) Apply zinc rich primer to heads of fasteners used externally in external walls or in other locations
subject to dampness.
e) Use top hat section plastic washers to isolate cartridge-fired nails from stainless steel
components fixed externally, in external walls or in other locations subject to dampness.
Z20.3104 Screw Fixings

a) All screws shall have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all screws into hardwood
shall have pilot holes about half the diameter of the shank.
b) Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws, pre-cut the thread with a
matching steel wood screw.
c) Do not hammer screws unless specifically designed to be hammered.
d) Countersink screw heads not less than 2mm below timber surfaces that will be visible in the
completed work, unless specified otherwise.
Z20.3105 Packings Generally

Ensure that packings do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with sealants.
Z20.3106 Nail Fixing

a) In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unless specified otherwise.
b) Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.
c) Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
Z20.3107 Plugs Generally

Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z22 SEALANTS.............................................................................................................2
Z22.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS..................................................................................... 2
Z22.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z22.2101 Types and Method .........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z22.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 3
Z22.3100 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 3

Z22.3101 Application .......................................................................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z22 SEALANTS
Z22.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS
Z22.2100 MATERIALS
Z22.2101 Types and Method
a) Sealant shall be suitable for the purpose intended, and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
b) Sealants shall not be in any way a potential health hazard. Maintain full up-to-date records of all
current published research and legislation in this respect. Obtain information from the sealant
manufacturer regarding storage, handling, use and disposal of sealants.
c) Wet applied sealants shall only be used in the locations shown on the Design Drawings or
Shop Drawings or as and where agreed with the CA, provided that all the requirements of the
Specification are satisfied.
d) Sealants shall be the most appropriate type and grade suitable for the intended application.
e) Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the CA
for consideration as to the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
f) Submit proposals and reference samples to the CA of the type and colour of the sealant prior
to ordering.
g) Sealant colour shall be agreed with the CA. State the period during which the sealant shall not
change in appearance or colour. Any discolouration of sealant during this time shall not be
acceptable.
h) The chemical composition of the sealant and primers, where any, shall be compatible with the
joint substrate, and with adjacent surface treatments or building components with which they
may come into contact.
i) Determine the appropriate hardness, compressibility or consistency of sealants in consultation
with the manufacturer, considering the joint movement and exposure for the size of joint. Upon
request, furnish information concerning theoretical joint movement related to the anticipated
temperatures at which sealants shall be installed and cured.
j) Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CA that the sealant joints can accommodate and are
compatible with any movements to which they may be subjected.
k) Sealants shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent with the degree of
exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall have strength
and modulus sufficiently high to resist damage by traffic, including indentation.
l) Sealants that are likely to stain, discolour or bleed into adjacent building materials shall not be
used. Provide independent testing evidence to this effect.
m) Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
i) Where the sealant is used in trafficked surfaces and/or requires to be fuel resistant, it
shall comply with BS EN 14188: Part 1 for hot applied sealants and BS EN 14188: Part
2 and BS 5212 for cold applied sealants.
ii) Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
UK performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the
required fire resistance requirement.
iii) Where sealants are in contact with drinking water, provide evidence of compliance with
UK water quality standards.
iv) Resistance to permanently wet service environments.
n) Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
o) Manufacturers’ product descriptions shall confirm compliance with performance standards
including the BS EN ISO 11600 coding and be confirmed on the package labels, in the
technical data sheets and on any certificates demonstrating performance capability.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
p) Sealants complying with the Specification shall be manufactured within an independently

assessed BS EN ISO 9000 series quality system. Each pack supplied shall have a batch
number and date of manufacture.
q) An on-Site test procedure as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be used as a means of
assessing the extent of sealant cure and/or adhesion to joint surfaces.
r) Sealants with a low VOC content in line with (SCAQMD) rule #1168.
Z22.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
Z22.3101 Application
a) Carefully prepare surfaces to receive sealant, using correct de-greasing solvents, primers and
bonding agents as necessary.
b) Where sealants are applied, either on or off Site, they shall be in accordance with BS 6213, BS
6093 or BS 8000: Part 16 and BS EN ISO 11600 as appropriate.
c) The application of sealants shall be in accordance with the supplier's/manufacturer's written
preparatory and application procedures and the Code of Practice prepared by the British
Adhesives and Sealant Association Manual of Good Practice or acceptable equivalent
organisation.
d) Excess sealant shall be removed and all joints shall be neat and clean. Only liquids approved by
the sealant manufacturer shall be used to tool freshly applied sealants.
e) Sealant shall be evenly applied without bubbles in joints.
f) Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or
damage from other activities or conditions on Site.
g) Joint fillers, when placed in the joint, shall provide a gap consistent with the required depth of
sealant. The cross section of sealant in the joint shall be of 2:1 width to depth unless otherwise
accepted. Joint fillers shall be as follows:
i) Compatible with the sealant used and surrounding construction elements.
ii) Formed from closed cell foam.
iii) Non-adhering to cured sealant.
h) Applicators shall operate within an approved BS EN ISO 9002 scheme.
i) Only materials meeting the Specification requirements and stored under appropriate conditions
shall be used for installation.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z25 GLASS AND COATINGS....................................................................................2
Z25.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z25.2110 Types of Glass ................................................................................................................................... 2
Z25.2111 Glazing Generally ...........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z25.2112 Safety Glass ....................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z25.2113 Annealed Glass...............................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2114 Laminated Glass.............................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2115 Toughened Glass ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2116 Heat Strengthened Glass ............................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2117 Wired Glass.....................................................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2118 Fire Resistant Glass.......................................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2119 Curved Glass (Tolerances)..........................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2120 Coatings and Tinting ......................................................................................................................... 7
Z25.2121 Glass Coatings Generally ............................................................................................................................................................7
Z25.2122 High Performance Glass Coatings............................................................................................................................................7
Z25.2123 Glass Body Tints ............................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2130 Unitised Systems ............................................................................................................................... 8
Z25.2131 Double Glazed Units .....................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2132 Visual Quality Testing....................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2140 Structural Silicone Glazing .............................................................................................................. 9
Z25.2141 Type and Method............................................................................................................................................................................9
Z25.2150 Rooflights/Horizontal and Inclined Glazing ................................................................................. 10
Z25.2151 Type and Method......................................................................................................................................................................... 10

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z25 GLASS AND COATINGS

Z25.2100 MATERIALS
Z25.2110 Types of Glass
Z25.2111 Glazing Generally

a) Glass manufacture shall comply generally with BS EN 572 for float (annealed glass), BS EN
1096 for coated glass, BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened glass, BS EN ISO 12543 for
laminated glass and BS EN 12150 for toughened glass. Visual quality testing for dimensional
requirements and visual defects of the respective glass types shall, as a minimum, be as cited in
these standards, unless specified otherwise.
b) All glass types shall be cut to accurate sizes with clean cut, arrised edges. Damage such as
shark teeth, serration hackle, sharp flare, flake chips, rough chips, feathered edges, shells or
other imperfections shall not be acceptable if detrimental to the visual and performance criteria
of the glass. Glass delivered to Site shall be of the required size. No cutting or nipping of glass
shall be allowed on Site. Variations in manufacture and performance of the glass shall not affect
its colour or appearance, while all glass of the same type shall be visually consistent in
appearance and colour at all times, having due regard to the direction and angle of view within
manufacturing tolerances and the agreed range of samples or observations of previous
installations of the same type of glass.
c) All glass shall be of the type specified in the relevant BS EN series range, while the glazing shall
be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
d) All glass panes within frames shall be installed to give the necessary edge cover and clearance
to ensure a permanent and safe installation. Glass panes with damaged edges, including
shelling and impact markings, shall not be fixed into the building under any circumstances.
e) Provide a warranty from the glass manufacturer, which states that the glazing systems comply
with the manufacturer's requirements, and indicates the life expectancy of the glass, interlayers,
spacers and other components.
f) Distortion shall be kept to an absolute minimum with no local defects (such as tong marks)
producing irregular reflections being allowed. All glass shall be manufactured and processed in
accordance with quality control procedures to BS EN ISO 9000 and are independently
maintained.
g) Stresses in glazing: Ensure that no glass or glazing combination develops stresses that may
lead to damage of glass, glazing materials, components and/or framing systems:
i) Conduct a thermal stress analysis and make due allowance for any thermally treated or
edge working of annealed glass which may be required.
ii) Take into account shading stresses that might occur from adjacent components, including
solar shading devices.
h) The method of glazing adopted shall take account of the manufacturing tolerances in the glass,
thus minimising the effects of distortion resulting.
i) All glass shall be capable of replacement without undue difficulty. Provide a method statement
showing the method of removing damaged glass and any associated metal framework and of
installing new components.
j) Provide glass with a colour rendering index (Ra) as specified, both for the transmittance and the
reflected spectrum and provide detailed reflected and transmitted spectrum data for the
purpose of identifying/anticipating the possible problems with colour reflection. Demonstrate
this by provision of full size samples of each glass type, which are to be viewed under
representative lighting conditions and accepted prior to material manufacture.
k) Provide all glass from a single supplier unless agreed otherwise by the CA and provide
certification proving the origin of the glass.
l) Ensure that glass does not contain impurities, which would detract in any way from the

rooflight system.
8/06/07
performance of the glazing system.

m) All exposed glass edges shall be ground and arrised.
n) All glass shall be free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches or any other visible
defects unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
o) Mirror glass is not acceptable unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
p) Where combinations of glass types are used in a unit, the least stringent criteria for viewing
shall be used in accordance with the relevant standards.
q) Prior to placing an order for any glazing materials, obtain all necessary confirmation and/or
calculations in writing from the glass manufacturer, on all aspects of the glazing systems for
review, as but not limited to the following:
i) Ventilating and draining provisions of the glazing rebates.
ii) Thickness of individual glass panes and of insulating glass units due to consideration of
the wind loadings specified.
iii) Snow and access loads for horizontal/inclined glazing conditions with consideration of the
wind loadings specified.
iv) Determination as to whether or not heat strengthening or toughening of glass will be
required.
v) Thickness and number of PVB interlayers (laminated glass).
vi) Thermal and shading performance of insulating glass units.
vii) Thermal safety of insulating glass units.
viii) Hardness, location, shape and dimensions of setting blocks and glazing gaskets.
ix) Depth and width of glazing rebates.
x) Expansion, tolerances, glass bite and clearance to meet all specified performance
requirements.
Z25.2112 Safety Glass

a) Select safety glass categories for use in critical locations as defined and recommended in BS
6262, BS EN ISO 12543, Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6, pr EN ISO 12543: Part 2 and BS EN 1279 as
required to comply with the Building Regulations, Local Authority requirements and other
relevant Health and Safety requirements. The selection of the glass type and thickness shall be
undertaken to meet the performance requirements of the Specification and to minimise the risk
to persons both during construction and during the service life of the works. The risk of failure
and the consequences of failure shall be documented and prepared by the Contractor for
review.
b) All safety glass shall be ‘Kite’, or other internationally recognised standard, marked and labelled
in accordance with the relevant standards and shall meet the requirements of Building
Regulations Approved Document N for safety glass, in a consistent position on the glass as
agreed with the CA.
c) Annealed float glass used as safety glass shall comply with BS 6262 and BS 6206 and BS EN
12600 including any labelling requirements.
d) Safety glass shall be tested to meet the requirements of BS 6206 and BS EN 12600.
e) Where it is necessary to meet the requirements of BS 6262, the Building Regulations and any
other health and safety requirements, manifestation shall be provided. The type of manifestation
shall be agreed with the CA and samples provided for acceptance.
f) Manifestation:
i) Location: As required by Approved Document N.
ii) Application:
• Factory applied: Ceramic fritting, screen printed.
• Site applied: Acid etched/vinyl adhesive backed film/etchlite/sand blasting.
iii) Colour: As defined in the particular requirements.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
iv) Setting out: Carefully set out to scan across panels to give a consistent rhythm and
spacing across the length of the façade.
Z25.2113 Annealed Glass

a) Unless otherwise specified and accepted in advance by the CA, all sheet glass shall be
manufactured by the float process. Other sheet glass shall not be acceptable without the prior
written agreement of the CA.
b) Untinted glass sheets shall provide a clear, undistorted vision and reflection.
c) The tolerances on thickness shall be as reproduced in BS 952: Part 1.
d) The tolerances on cut sizes for different thicknesses of material shall be as BS EN 572: Part 2.
e) Visual quality testing of annealed glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall be
in accordance with BS EN 572: Part 2.
Z25.2114 Laminated Glass

a) Utilise expertise and experience for the selection of glass in order to comply with the
performance requirements of the Specification.
b) Laminated glass shall be in accordance with BS 952, BS EN 572, pr EN ISO 12543: Part 2
and BS EN ISO 12543: Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
c) Laminated glass shall consist of a number of sheets of flat glass with a suitable interlayer to suit
the solar performance requirements, or methyl metacrylate resin interleaving between each
layer. Interlay material shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 100 degrees.
The layers can be clear, translucent or coloured depending on the design intentions of the
glazing. The glass may be annealed, heat strengthened or heat soak toughened, as required to
meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
d) The Design Drawings shall show the visual requirements of the CA. Final selection of glass type
and thickness of each layer, together with type, opacity, density and location of interlayer and
coatings shall be accepted by the CA prior to ordering materials.
e) All glass shall meet the colour and quality standards set by the Control Samples.
f) Laminated glass edges shall be sealed with materials compatible with the interlayer.
Delamination of the laminated glass for any reason is not acceptable.
g) Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 2000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass observing it perpendicularly (the matt screen being on the other
side of the glass) in accordance with BS EN ISO 12543: Part 6. Defects that are disturbing
when viewed shall be marked.
Or
h) Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of the
room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
sunlight or artificial lighting.
i) The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes shall be cut flush over the width of the
pane to provide even distribution of vertical load to the setting blocks.
Z25.2115 Toughened Glass

a) The use of toughened glass shall be justified by risk assessment and/or calculations, with the
general aim of minimising its use.
b) All toughened glass shall be heat soaked to DIN 18516: Part 4 paying particular attention to
temperature and duration of treatment. Prior to heat soaking, provide written reports to
demonstrate oven and thermocouple calibration and temperature tolerances. Demonstrate that,
despite temperature tolerances, the glass temperature in all parts of the oven was maintained at
or above 290° C ±10° C for 8 hours. Provide detailed records of heat soaking for each batch
prior to delivery to site. Alternatively, if the calibration equipment of the oven permits then the
regime detailed in Draft Standard BS EN 1279: Part 1 may be adopted.
c) The glass shall conform to BS EN 12150 and the following requirements in the horizontal
toughening process:
i) Maximum overall bow: 0.003mm per millimetre measured along the glass edge.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
ii) Maximum local bow: The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to trough shall not
exceed 0.3mm per 300mm or 0.15mm at the edge.
iii) Rollerwave: Glass shall be sized to provide for the consistent and horizontally aligned
orientation of ripples throughout the Works. The maximum deviation for flatness from peak
to trough shall not exceed 0.08mm. In any event, state in the Tender submission
proposals to control the extent of rollerwave, if any. Provide full size samples of all
specified heat treated glass to signify the range of rollerwave throughout the Works, prior
to commencing production of the glass.
iv) Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum.
d) Visual quality testing of toughened glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall
be in accordance with BS EN 12150: Part 1.
Or
e) Visual quality testing of toughened glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of the
room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
f) Exposed edge working shall be flat ground with small ground arris and have a frosted
appearance. Small shells and/or chips, exceeding a maximum diameter of 2mm, shall be ground
out prior to toughening.
g) The surface compressive stress shall be demonstrated by non-destructive testing, to be
controlled at the Works at >=120N/mm².
h) All glass shall be cut to accurate sizes and delivered to the Site in the required sizes. No on-
Site cutting or nipping shall be allowed. The glass shall be clearly marked to show its intended
final position and orientation.
i) Ensure that glass heat treatment requirements are satisfactory to meet wind, impact, thermal or
other loads anticipated in the Works. The manufacturer of the toughened glass shall be made
aware of its intended use in the construction. Any drilling and notching shall be carried out with
the agreement of the manufacturer of the toughened glass and prior to the toughening being
carried out. All toughened glass shall be tempered on a roller heath furnace eliminating tong
marks and shall conform to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600 (Class A /Class 1B1).
j) Ensure that the toughening process does not produce iridescence, distortion, roll marks or
ripples in the glass which are unacceptable to the CA. Such anticipated imperfections shall be
demonstrated by the provision of full size samples prior to commencement of glass production.
The CA will examine the samples provided and reasonably advise what is acceptable and what
is unacceptable. All glass produced for the Works shall comply with the acceptable samples as
a minimum standard.
k) Prior to commencement of manufacture, advise the CA of the glass supplier and the premises
where fabrication and processing shall be carried out.
l) Prior to installation of the toughened glass, ensure that all documentary evidence is in place and
demonstrate with such evidence that the glass has been heat soaked for the prescribed
periods. Such evidence shall also include, as a minimum, the following:
i) Source of supply and evidence of batching.
ii) Dates and records of toughening/heat soaking of all glass.
iii) Certification that the glass shall meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
iv) Records to include details of all units that failed during the heat soak test.
m) The CA shall be given the opportunity of visiting the glass manufacturer’s premises during
fabrication and/or processing.
n) The toughening process shall not create any stresses in the glass that are visible within the
limits specified.
o) The toughening process shall not affect the appearance of the coating.
p) No cooling jet marks shall be visible on the finished surface of the toughened glass.
q) Any discolouration or distortion caused by the toughening process shall be unacceptable
outside of roller wave distortion and glass bow specified.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
r) Take all reasonable measures to control the toughening process so as to avoid the occurrence
of anisotropy at the time of manufacture. Glass shall be rejected if it does not fall within the
range of agreed samples.
Z25.2116 Heat Strengthened Glass

a) Unless otherwise specified, all heat strengthened glass shall comply with the requirements of
BS EN 1863.
b) Visual quality testing of heat strengthened glass for dimensional requirements and visual
defects shall be in accordance with BS EN 1863: Part 1.
Or
c) Visual quality testing of heat strengthened glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm
from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage
of the room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
d) When subject to a fracture test in accordance with BS 6206 and BS EN 12600, the fracture
characteristics shall be similar to annealed glass and therefore, heat strengthened glass shall
not be considered as a ‘safety’ glass. If heat strengthened glass is proposed for use in a
situation that requires a safety glazing material, it shall be laminated.
Z25.2117 Wired Glass

a) Wired glass shall comprise “polished wired glass” as defined in BS 952: Part 1 and BS EN
572: Part 1.
b) Glass shall be annealed.
c) Glass shall be of the thickness specified and, unless otherwise specified, with 1.3mm
‘Georgian’ wire embedded within the glass thickness.
d) Tolerances on wired glass thickness shall be to the minimum specified in BS 952: Part 1 and
the length, breadth and squareness as specified in BS EN 572: Part 3 for polished glass and
BS EN 572: Part 6 for patterned glass.
Z25.2118 Fire Resistant Glass

a) Fire resisting glass shall provide the fire ratings specified, tested to BS 476: Parts 20 and 22.
b) Fire resisting glazing shall also be classified as safety glass to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600,
minimum category Class B/ Class 2B2.
c) Fire resisting glazing shall incorporate fire rated beading and fixing methods to match the fire
rating specified. It shall also be tested or certified or assessed as being equal to the relevant
parts of BS 476.
d) Unless otherwise specified, wired glass shall not be used. Glass shall be clear, with fire
resisting properties as specified above.
e) Submit technical/product information on all fire resisting glass proposed for review by the CA. It
is recognised that the glass will not necessarily meet the visual quality requirements set out in
the Specification. Submit details of the visual quality and dimensional limits of any proposed fire
resistant glass for review by the CA.
f) Where insulation is specified in addition to stability/integrity this shall be in accordance with
Building Regulations Part B tested to the relevant parts of BS 476.
Z25.2119 Curved Glass (Tolerances)

a) The maximum variation in curved form shall be ±4mm from the theoretical form.
b) The maximum variation in adjacent glass edges when installed shall be 1mm per 1000mm.
c) The maximum difference between curved adjacent glass edges when installed shall be 3mm.
d) All curved glass panels shall be continuously curved from edge to edge for the full radius with
no straight returns.
e) The maximum allowed deviation of the length and width of sheets shall be ±4mm for
dimensions up to and including 2000mm and ±4.5mm for dimensions over 2000mm.
f) The maximum allowed deviation of the diagonal dimension of any sheet shall be ±7mm for
dimensions over 2000mm.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
g) The maximum allowed deviation of the top and bottom edges (i.e. the curved edges) measured
on the face of the glass and perpendicularly to the curvature shall be ±3mm.
Z25.2120 Coatings and Tinting
Z25.2121 Glass Coatings Generally

a) Submit to the CA detailed proposals in respect of coatings.
b) Surface coatings: A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface
modified glass. Such coatings shall be consistent in colour, durable and sufficiently hard on
exposed surfaces to avoid damage.
c) Visual quality testing of coated glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall be in
accordance with BS EN 1096: Part 1.
d) Ceramic frit coatings:
i) Tolerances for positioning and sizes of prints shall comply with optical quality determined
viewing from a distance of 3000mm using daylight without direct sunlight or direct
spotlight, perpendicularly to the glass, for no more than 20 seconds.
ii) Apply smoothly and consistently over the whole, or part, of each glazed area as indicated
on the Design Drawings. Use a screen printing application method unless otherwise
agreed.
iii) Fuse into the surface of the glass, thus providing a permanent layer (with the exception of
the exposed internal surface).
iv) The coatings shall have similar sheen, chromaticity and luminosity, to give non-discernible
colour difference when viewed by eye and illuminated by a standard light source, and shall
colour match. All ceramic fritting shall be opaque and to a colour to be agreed with the
CA.
v) Extent: Unless noted otherwise, the frit pattern shall extend to the glass edges. There shall
be no clear border.
e) Requirements for coatings/surface modified glass:
i) A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface modified
glass. Such coatings shall be neutral in colour, durable and sufficiently hard on exposed
surfaces to avoid damage. For the purposes of the Specification, neutral shall be defined
as a colour having no unacceptable hue quantified by range of samples and being
capable of refracting light without chromatic aberration when viewed from any direction.
ii) Unless otherwise agreed, all low E glass shall be produced from a single source on a
single process.
iii) All glass coatings shall be provided from a single manufacturer/supplier unless agreed
otherwise by the CA.
f) Coatings/Treatments/Interlayers shall not crack, disintegrate or corrode in any way under the
extremes of conditions outlined in the Specification.
g) Advise the CA, prior to commencement of the glass coating, the name of the supplier and
applicator, together with the location of the premises where this work shall be carried out.
Z25.2122 High Performance Glass Coatings

a) Coated glass shall comply with BS EN 1096 as relevant.
b) Panes of glass with coatings shall be examined for defects in accordance with BS EN 1096:
Part 1, viewed from a distance of 3000mm from the outside face of the glazing, for both the
main area and the edge area of the glass panes.
c) Acceptance criteria of coated glass defects for uniformity, stain, spots/pinholes, clusters and
scratches shall be in accordance with BS EN 1096: Part 1.
d) Where soft coatings are used in double glazed units the glass shall be edge stripped on the
coating side to a width corresponding to the width of the spacer bar (complete with butyl strip)
such that when the panes are sealed together no discolouration to the coating by the butyl strip
occurs around the perimeter of the double glazed unit. The occurrence of a red or blue line
around the perimeter of the glass panes shall be deemed unacceptable.
e) Where soft coatings are applied to glass panes they shall be suitably protected up until time of

rooflight system.
8/06/07
installation with the double glazed unit and all handling of glass shall be carried out using
protective cotton or surgical gloves so as not to damage the surface of the coating with
fingerprints. After protection is removed from the coated glass panes the panes must be
installed into the double glazed units and sealed within the recommended time by the coating
manufacturer, to avoid any atmospheric deformation of the surface.
f) Provide samples minimum 1200mm x 1200mm in size of any coated glass types for review by
the CA.
Z25.2123 Glass Body Tints

a) Provide evidence from the glass manufacturer that the correct body tinting has been
incorporated at the appropriate stage into the materials used by the glass manufacturer when
this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
b) Provide evidence that the correct surface modified tinting has been applied by the glass
manufacturer, where this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
Z25.2130 Unitised Systems
Z25.2131 Double Glazed Units

a) Unless otherwise specified, double glazed units shall be hermetically sealed units complying
with BS 5713 or BS EN 1279. Double glazed units shall utilise panes of unequal thickness,
unless otherwise specified. The outer panes shall be thicker to minimise the effects of pillowing.
b) Spacers shall be of adequate rigidity for their purpose, be continuous, with bent corners and
shall have welded joints sealed to ensure the integrity of the seal and to provide a consistent
moisture seal around the entire perimeter of the unit. They shall accommodate the seal and
contain desiccant, allowing both to operate at maximum efficiency.
c) Spacers shall separate glass panes and the units shall have a mechanically applied primary
polyisobutylene seal between glass and spacer. This shall provide a continuous vapour-proof
barrier to a minimum width of 2mm and a secondary two part silicone seal to the perimeter of
the units to carry wind loads.
d) Spacers shall be black where exposed. Silicone seals to edge to be grey. Provide samples for
acceptance by the CA.
e) Drainage of water along edge seals shall not be permitted.
f) All double glazed units shall be assembled in controlled temperature and humidity conditions.
Breather tubes shall be used, if necessary, during manufacture and transportation. These shall
be thereafter removed and the units sealed prior to manufacture.
g) With regard to mechanically restrained glazing systems, the manufacturer shall confirm the
maximum compression allowable on the edge of the units.
h) State the maximum concavity and convexity that will occur under the ambient climatic conditions
and barometer pressure differentials anticipated by the requirements of the Specification.
Ensure that the double glazed units are flat (with a maximum deviation of 1/1000 at the centre
of the glass pane when measured diagonally) when finally installed.
i) The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes within vertical double glazed units shall
be ground flush over the width of the pane to provide even distribution of load to the setting
blocks.
j) Double glazed units shall carry a test certificate/report carried out by an independent authority,
showing compliance with BS EN 1279: Part 2.
Z25.2132 Visual Quality Testing

Visual quality testing of insulated glass units of float glass shall be carried out at a distance of
1000mm from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal
usage of the room and the following discrepancies, or better, shall be allowed per unit:
a) Rebate zone (width 18mm – no limit on discrepancies, with the exception of mechanical
damage to the edges):
i) External shallow damage to the edge or conchoidal fractures, which do not affect the
glass strength and which do not project beyond the width of the edge seal.
ii) Internal conchoidal fractures without loose shards, which are filled by the sealant.
iii) Unlimited spots or patches of residue, or scratches.
rooflight system.
8/06/07
b) Edge zone - area around edge with width (w)/10 or height (h)/10 respectively:
i) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc.:
• Pane area not less than or equal to 1m²: Maximum 4 cases, each not less than or
equal to 3mm diameter.
• Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each not less than or equal to 3mm
diameter per metre of perimeter.
ii) Residues (spots) in the gas-filled cavity:
• Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each not less than or equal to 3mm
diameter per metre of perimeter.
iii) Residues (patches) in the gas-filled cavity: Whitish grey or transparent – maximum 1 case
not less than or equal to 3cm².
iv) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 90mm. Individual length; maximum 30mm.
v) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
c) Main zone (remainder of unit inside the edge zone):
i) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc.:
• Pane area greater than 1m² but not less than or equal to 2m²: Maximum 3 cases,
each not less than or equal to 2mm diameter.
• Pane area greater than 2m²: Maximum 5 cases, each not less than or equal to 2mm
diameter.
ii) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 45mm. Individual length; maximum 15mm.
iii) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
d) Main and edge zone combined:
i) Maximum number of allowable discrepancies as in edge zone.
ii) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc. of dimensions 0.5 – 1.0mm are allowable without
any area-related limitation, except when they appear in higher concentration. “ Higher
concentration” means that at least 4 inclusions, bubbles, points, patches, etc. are located
within a circle with a diameter of not less than or equal to 20cm.
e) Visual inspection of the glass edges, edge seals and spacers shall be unhindered, prior to
glazing.
Z25.2140 Structural Sealant Glazing
Z25.2141 Type and Method

a) General:
i) Be responsible for the structural sealant glazing based upon the Design Drawings and the
ii) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, testing, fabrication, transportation and
installation of the structural silicone glazing, all in accordance with BS EN ISO 11600
and/or other standards specified and detailed in the Specification and submit samples for
review by the CA prior to manufacture.
iii) The structural sealant glazing shall be carried out in such a manner that will not
compromise the integrity of the double glazed units’ edge seals and the specified
warranties.
iv) Structural sealant glazing application shall only be carried out in an appropriate working
environment. The environment shall be strictly controlled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written instructions to maintain temperature, humidity, dust and dirt free
conditions, etc. in the working environment.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
v) Structural sealant glazing shall be suited to local conditions including blown sand. The
grade of sealant/silicone shall be suited to the local temperature and solar exposure and
at least capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 100 degrees.
b) Materials:
i) Provide structural silicone adhesive, which shall be obtained from a single source
manufacturer and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations.
ii) For marine, or similar environments, the structural silicone shall be resistant to damage
from algae or attack by birds.
c) Installation/Fabrication:
i) Structural silicone glazing application shall not be carried out on Site unless agreed
otherwise with the CA.
ii) Provide documentation of the sealant manufacturer’s requirements for the particular
substrate of the construction including joint sizes, limitations and requirements for mixing,
cleaning, surface preparation, priming and application.
iii) Provide evidence that the sealant has been selected taking into account the sealant
manufacturer’s recommendations as to use and compatibility with the contact surfaces.
iv) Joint design shall be in accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s written
recommendations for glue-line and bite to glue-line ratio, taking into consideration the
design wind pressures and panel sizes.
v) Provide details of tensometer and any other testing equipment as required.
vi) Glazing procedures shall include frame assembly, cleaning, priming (if necessary),
gunning, tooling and frame handling after glazing and curing. Sealants shall not be applied
when the temperature is below 4°C and units shall not be moved until the silicone has
achieved a level of cure recommended by the silicone supplier.
vii) Adopt silicone batching logging procedures to record all batches used, including batch
manufacture date and arrival date of each batch at the fabrication works. The location of
each structural silicone glazed panel shall be individually located on As-built Drawings of
the building, recording date and batch of structural silicone, with details of tests carried
out to ensure that the highest quality of silicone is being used.
viii) The structural silicone glazing shall be recorded at the time of assembly and shall include
identification marks of every panel by a unique number, readable from the inside of the
building for the life of the building. Provide glazing records with information on each panel
including silicone type, batch, date of application, glazier’s name and temperature and
humidity measured inside the factory on the day of assembly.
ix) Recommend a periodical maintenance regime for agreement with the CA. This shall be
incorporated in the O&M manuals. Acceptance criteria shall be consistent with the
requirements of the testing criteria, which as a minimum shall be:
• A standard ‘peel test’ on any broken panels that require replacement.
• A close visual inspection, to be carried out externally from the cleaning apparatus,
including application of hand pressure to verify continued adhesion. This exercise
shall be carried out for 1% of the cladding, at a yearly frequency for the first 3 years,
then at a frequency of 5 years following. The panels shall be randomly selected
around the elevations at varying heights.
• The tests shall be carried out by the sealant supplier, or other qualified body.
Z25.2150 Rooflights/Horizontal and Inclined Glazing
Z25.2151 Type and Method

a) Horizontal glazing shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of ACR(M) 001, CWCT
Technical Note No. 42 in addition to the ‘Health and Safety in Roof Work’ guidance book
(G)33, Appendix 4, the HSE and CDM regulations and shall be manufactured only by a
company registered to BS EN ISO 9001 or carrying European Technical Approval (ETA).
b) Glazing for rooflights or horizontal and inclined situations shall be capable of accommodating
the following live loads without any reduction in its performance:

rooflight system.
8/06/07
i) All defined loads resulting from specified movements of the main structural frame during
building use.
ii) Point loads imposed on the glass framing members of 695N inwardly acting based upon
BS 5516. Maintenance loads shall not be carried by the glass infill panels.
iii) Wind loads as defined by BS 6399: Part 2 and BS 5516.
iv) Loads imposed by snow as determined by BS 6399: Part 3 and BS 5516.
v) Minimum working pressures on infill panels for hand cleaning operations as defined in BS
5516.
vi) The impact load of two persons falling on it during maintenance, cleaning and inspection
operations in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The glazing system
to maintain its structural integrity and the glass and edge covering to have adequate
thickness so that units do not ‘pop out’ of the frame under such impact. Should the outer
layer of glass break, then the inner sheet glass shall stay in place and support the
operatives.
vii) Large body impact tests by an accredited test organisation with certification produced to
demonstrate compliance to an energy level of 1200J, when tested to prEN 1873.
c) When calculating loads on the glazing and structure, the worst combination of the above shall
be considered, taking into account of the fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations
may determine more than one design criterion.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z30 METALWORK FINISHES ....................................................................................2
Z30.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z30.2101 Appearance......................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2102 Surface Preparation of Steelwork ..............................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2200 FINISHES ............................................................................................................................ 2

Z30.2201 Liquid Organic Coating ................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2202 Plating of Surfaces.........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2203 Vitreous Enamelling .......................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2204 Galvanising Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2205 Galvanised Self Finish Surfaces.................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2206 Galvanised Surfaces to be Over Painted.................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z30 METALWORK FINISHES

Z30.2100 MATERIALS
Z30.2101 Appearance
a) All finishes shall be stable, fade resistant and not affected by ultraviolet light. Provide data and
samples for review by the CA.
b) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and be resilient to all known and/or
specified environmental and pollution effects. This shall include scratching and cigarette smoke
and burns, etc. Submit data and samples for review by the CA.
c) Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer’s
recommended products and system, matching original finish for colour, texture and gloss.
Repair coatings shall be visually acceptable to the CA. Confirmation shall be provided that the
repair to the damaged finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification.
Guarantee in writing that the damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed
remedial paint system. Employ an independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection
and any necessary tests and supply a full report to the CA.
d) All finishes shall be within the limits of the agreed samples and without irregularities or
distortions. Fixings, stiffeners, etc. which are not intended to be visible shall be treated so that
there is no discontinuity in the finished surface appearance.
Z30.2102 Surface Preparation of Steelwork

Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a surface
equivalent in cleanliness to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. (BS EN ISO 8501:
Part 1). In general this shall be achieved by acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil,
grease, welding slag, etc. renders this ineffective, and in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally blast-
cleaned to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. (BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1).
Z30.2200 FINISHES
Z30.2201 Liquid Organic Coating
For aluminium alloy components to BS 4842.
Z30.2202 Plating of Surfaces
a) Cadmium/zinc plating of iron and steel surfaces shall comply with BS EN 12329 and BS EN
12330.
b) Chromium plating shall comply with BS EN 12540.
Z30.2203 Vitreous Enamelling

Vitreous enamelling of steel surfaces shall comply with BS 3830.
Z30.2204 Galvanising Generally

a) To BS EN ISO 1461.
b) Coating thicknesses shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461 and BS EN ISO 14713 to suit the
c) Where galvanising is visible, the final finish shall be smooth, continuous, consistent and free
from flux staining and other forms of staining. Coating weight shall be as consistent maintaining
a uniform appearance throughout the service life of the Works.
Z30.2205 Galvanised Self Finish Surfaces

a) Blast Clean: Blast clean to BS EN ISO 8504: Parts 1 and 2 and BS EN ISO 8503, Sa 2.5
where applied thickness of coating is greater than 86 microns.
b) Preparation: Edge grind, remove all grease, oil and varnish and any other surface contaminants,
ensure that any oil or silicon based anti-weld spatter is removed, remove weld spatter, grind
rooflight system.
8/06/07
welds as required and fill pits and other surface imperfections that may cause the premature
failure of the coating system.
c) Galvanising: The steelwork shall be supplied to the galvaniser in a suitable condition to be acid
pickled in dilute hydrochloric acid, passivated and then hot dip galvanised in accordance with
the provisions of BS EN ISO 1461.
d) Uniformity: The galvanising shall be carried out in such a way as to maximise the smoothness
and uniformity of the deposited coating. Only use double dipping where no alternative exists.
e) Touching-up is not allowed unless agreement is given by the CA. In which case it shall be in
accordance with Annex C of BS EN ISO 1461.
i) Where acceptance is given, use the Zilt-Stick system in accordance with the
manufacturer’s current recommendations. Zilt-Stick is a self-fluxing and galvanising
system, which is applied by hand. The stick is made up of a galvanising compound, which
has a “foil” wrapping, and is rubbed over the affected area until completely covered. The
black flux residue can be removed using a damp cloth.
ii) The maximum size of an area of touch-up is to be determined by locating the point on the
damaged surface that is furthest from an intact galvanised coating. If the distance from
this point to the galvanising is in excess of 10mm, then the member shall be re-galvanised
or rejected.
iii) Galvafroid or paint applied finishes are not permitted under any circumstances.
f) Refer to the recommendations of the Zinc Development Association for galvanising and zinc
metal-spraying.
g) Immersion process: This shall be discussed and agreed with the CA and submitted for formal
comment. This is to ensure that during the galvanising process drips are not allowed to run off
fair-faced surfaces and thus disfigure them. Fair-faced surfaces are all those surfaces that will
be visible in the completed Works. Agree location of all fair-faced surfaces with the CA before
application.
h) Breathing Holes: Locate in unobtrusive places. Agree the location of these holes with the CA
and mark clearly on the Shop Drawings.
i) Distortion: Ensure that no distortion of fabricated elements occurs during galvanising. Advise
the CA on the possibility for distortion of the steelwork elements during the galvanising process
to enable design modifications of components to be made before fabrication of these
components.
Z30.2206 Galvanised Surfaces to be Over Painted

a) Galvanised steelwork to be painted.
i) Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer of the applied coating system.
To BS EN ISO 1461 and BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1 to 8.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z31 POWDER COATINGS.........................................................................................2
Z31.2100 BRITISH STANDARD COMPLIANT TYPE POWDER COATINGS............................ 2

Z31.2101 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2102 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2103 Workmanship ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2104 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z31 POWDER COATINGS

Z31.2100 BRITISH STANDARD COMPLIANT TYPE POWDER COATINGS

Z31.2101 General
a) Powder coating shall be applied using only materials suitable for the purpose intended.
Aluminium alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all
components is consistent and identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063 or 6060
or acceptable equivalent complying with BS EN 754: Parts 3-5 and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9, and
for sheet material grade 1200/3103 complying with BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS
EN 573: Parts 1-4. Aluminium shall be in a condition suitable for the application of the coating
process. The sheet shall be of a suitable and agreed thickness and of suitable temper to
withstand the stoving process.
b) The application shall comply with all the relevant parts of the COSHH Regulations 1988, the
Environmental Protection Act 1990 Part 1, the Management of Health and Safety at Work
Regulations 1992 and the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994.
Z31.2102 Materials
a) Colour: The colour shall be selected by the CA from the BS/RAL ranges.
b) Colour Consistency: Colour consistency shall be assured from batch to batch for the Works, in
accordance with the conditions described in BS 950: Part 1.
c) Colour Uniformity: Limits for acceptable colour variations in production shall be established and
accepted by the CA from samples provided by the Contractor prior to production. When
metallic colours are used, top and bottom limits of colour variation and appearance shall be
established and agreed prior to coating commencement. All colour samples shall be submitted
and accepted by the CA before coating commences.
d) The minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not vary by more
than 20%. If this is not achievable, submit samples to the CA for review showing the maximum
variation in coating thickness.
e) The powder coating shall be consistent throughout in all respects within the upper and lower
levels agreed which shall be based on samples provided and agreed with the CA.
f) Protective Tapes/Films: Adhesive/protective tapes/films shall be low tack type applied at room
temperature, remaining in contact with the surface for a maximum period of 6 months. Should
longer periods be required, then the tape/film shall be removed and replaced. Where
adhesive/protective tapes/films are used, then the colour shall be white or lighter in tone than
the powder coating.
Z31.2103 Workmanship
a) The selected coating shall carry a current British Board of Agrément Approval Certificate or
acceptable equivalent. A copy, signed by the Managing Director of the coating applicator
company, shall be made available to the CA, prior to commencement of coating.
b) Applicator Requirements: The powder coating application and stoving shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 6496 and/or BS 6497. Only one coating plant shall be used for the
Works along with one batch of powder, unless otherwise accepted by the CA.
c) Guarantees: Make available to the CA, fully documented and signed copies of the coating
guarantees. The duration of the guarantees shall be 25 years or as otherwise agreed with the
CA.
d) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees detailed
above shall be 12 months unless agreed otherwise by the CA.
e) Repair of Damage: Damage shall be repaired immediately. Site rectification of damage shall
generally not be acceptable and only be carried out with the CA’s agreement carrying a
guarantee for colour retention, gloss retention and adhesion for the remaining period of the
guarantee.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
f) In addition to the requirements of BS 6496 the pretreatment shall use a chromate process.
Z31.2104 Testing
Demonstrate compliance with the following test requirements:
a) Artificial Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D 4214 when tested in accordance with BS 6496,
Clause 4.10 (a) or BS 6497, Clause 4.8 (a). In addition, the coating shall show no cracking,
checking or flaking and any change in colour shall not exceed one step in hue, value or chroma
in the Munsell atlas from the original colour.
b) Natural Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D 4214 when tested for three years in accordance
with BS 6496, Clause 4.10 (a) or BS 6497, Clause 4.8 (b). In addition, the coating shall show
no checking, cracking or flaking and any change in colour shall not exceed one step in hue,
value or chroma in the Munsell atlas from the original colour.
c) Exterior Exposure: When viewed from a distance of 1m, there shall be no blisters, dirt,
entrapped particles, craters, pinholes, porosity, scratches or other visual defects on significant
surfaces when measured in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 10.2.
d) Impact Resistance: There shall be no sign of cracking or detachment of film, when measured in
accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.7.
e) Cupping Test: There shall be no sign of detachment when measured in accordance with BS
6496, Clause 4.5.
f) Scratch Test: There shall be no penetration to the substrate when tested in accordance with
BS 6496, Clause 4.6.
g) Adhesion: The coating shall have a classification of Class 0 and there shall be no removal of the
coating when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.4.
h) Flexibility: There shall be no cracking, flaking or film deformation above 6mm when tested in
accordance with BS EN ISO 6860.
i) Salt Spray Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the coating shall occur when
tested for 1000 hours on aluminium to BS 6496, Clause 4.9 or for 500 hours on galvanised
steel to BS 6497, Clause 4.7.
j) Humidity Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the film shall occur when tested
in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.11.
k) Permeability: The coating, when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.13, shall show
no blistering of the coating, except within 3mm of any edge.
l) Mortar Resistance: There shall be no blistering, softening or detachment of the coating, etc.
when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.8.
m) Film Thickness: The minimum film thickness at any point shall be 40 microns for aluminium and
60 microns for galvanised steel. (Note 1: - Where hazardous environments are involved, the
minimum shall be increased to 60 microns and 80 microns respectively.) (Note 2: - Some
colours also require the minimum film thickness to be increased to 60 microns to develop the
correct intensity of colour.) No seeding or double coating of work shall be accepted.
n) Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60 degree Gardiner head, shall read: -
25% ±5% for matts, 70% ±5% for satins and 85% ±5% for gloss.
o) Spread of Flame: The Powder Coating, when tested to BS 476: Part 7, shall have a Class 1
rating.
p) Building Regulations: The Powder Coating shall have a Class 0 rating as defined under the
Building Regulations.
q) Product tests shall meet all the requirements of the Specification.
r) Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated
aluminium. Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat
coated/significant surface, as defined in BS EN ISO 2064, on which to conduct instrumental
measurements. The Shop Drawings shall indicate exposed/significant surfaces.
s) Tests shall be performed on exposed/significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 as
indicated, and shall meet the requirements of BS 6496 or BS 6497.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
t) Test reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the CA. These
reports shall include:
i) Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
ii) Identification of the coating system tested, including product supplier, colour reference,
product code and batch reference.
iii) Statement indicating that the coating system tested passed all tests, or failed one or
more.
iv) In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
v) Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.
vi) Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
vii) The CA shall commission an independent testing authority, with the Contractor being
responsible for all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use,
carry out a minimum of three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures
and plans as set out in BS 6001: Part 1 for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable
Quality Level) = 1% on each colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall
be carried out at the finishing plant prior to fabrication by an independent, consultant or
acceptance laboratory.
viii) In addition, the Contractor shall make allowance for Site inspections where, due to
damage or non-supply of the production test reports, the CA may require independent
investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units. This investigation shall be carried out within
the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ (Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) + 5%. For the
purpose of this inspection, each section in the window curtain wall or other fabrication
shall be taken as an individual component in assessing the overall batch number to allow
the acceptance inspection laboratory to certify that the Works comply with the
Specification. For units that are finished in fewer than three production runs, acceptance
inspections shall also be made using BS 6001: Part 2 to the same LQ.
ix) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting
responsibility may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z32 PVDF COATINGS.................................................................................................2
Z32.2100 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATINGS .................................................... 2

Z32.2101 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2102 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2103 Application Workmanship ............................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2104 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z32.2105 Product Tests ..................................................................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z32 PVDF COATINGS

Z32.2100 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATINGS

The selected PVDF coating system is required to achieve a high quality durable finish in accordance
with the requirements identified herein. The formulation mix shall be not less than 70% polyvinylidene
fluoropolymer resin with the remaining percentage made up of acrylics.
Z32.2101 General
a) PVDF coating shall be carried out using materials suitable for the intended purpose. Aluminium
alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all components is
constant and identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063, 6060 or acceptable
equivalent, complying with BS EN 515, BS EN 573: Parts 3 and 4, and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9
and for sheet material grade 1200/3103, complying with BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515
and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4. All aluminium shall be in a condition suitable for the application of
the coating process. The sheet shall be of a suitable and agreed thickness and of suitable
temper to withstand the stoving process.
b) In conjunction with the CA, ensure that the application complies with all the relevant parts of the
COSHH Regulations 1988, the Environmental Protection Act 1990 Part 1, the Management of
Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1992 and the Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 1994.
Z32.2102 Materials
a) Colour: The colour shall be selected by the CA from the BS/RAL ranges.
b) Colour Consistency: Colour consistency shall be maintained between batches, in accordance
with BS 950: Part 1.
c) Colour Uniformity: Limits for acceptable colour variations in production shall be established and
agreed by the CA from samples provided, prior to production. When metallic colours are to be
used, the top and bottom limits of colour variation and appearance shall be accepted by the CA
prior to coating commencement. The grain on PVDF coated materials shall be identified in order
to ensure that they are fixed in the same direction in their finished position.
d) The PVDF coating minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not
vary by more than 20%. Submitted samples shall confirm compliance.
e) The PVDF coating finish shall be identical in all respects subject to the criterion specified, on all
components similarly finished, and hung in the same direction.
f) Protective Tapes/Films: When adhesive/protective tapes/films are proposed to protect finished
products, tapes/films of a low tack nature shall be used. They shall be applied at room
temperature, after the coating is fully stoved, and remain in contact with the surface for a
maximum period of six months. Should longer periods be required, then the tape/film shall be
removed and replaced. Care shall be taken when removing adhesive/protective tapes/films. No
sharp instruments or abrasive materials shall be used to remove the tape/film. No solvents or
cleaning solutions shall be used to remove residues, without the prior permission of the CA.
Where adhesive/protective tapes/films are used, then the colour shall be white or lighter in tone
than the finish it is protecting.
Z32.2103 Application Workmanship

a) Applicator Requirements: The PVDF coating application and stoving shall be carried out in
accordance with AAMA 2605. The applicator shall agree to work to this standard and be
accepted by the coating supplier. Only one coating plant shall be used along with only one
batch of paint, unless otherwise accepted by the CA.
b) Guarantees: Make available to the CA, fully documented and signed copies of the coating
guarantees. The duration of these guarantees shall be 25 years or as otherwise advised at the
time of Tender, appropriate to the environmental conditions prevailing on Site.
c) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall be
not less than 12 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
d) Repair of Damage: If during installation, or later, damage occurs, this shall be rectified
immediately and not left to the end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be
carried out with the CA’s acceptance and shall carry a guarantee for colour retention, gloss
retention and adhesion for the remaining period of the original guarantee.
Z32.2104 Testing
a) Carry out the following tests or provide data demonstrating that the following tests have been
carried out. All PVDF coatings applied to aluminium shall comply with the requirements of
AAMA 2605 including:
i) Gloss Retention: The residual gloss shall be at least 50%, after 10 years' exposure in
Florida, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.4.
ii) Colour Retention: A maximum colour change of Delta E5, after 10 years' exposure in
Florida, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.2.
iii) Exterior Exposure: When viewed from a distance of 3m, no visible blisters, scratches, flow
lines, streaks or other visual defects shall be allowed, in accordance with AAMA 2605,
Clause 4.2.
iv) Impact Resistance: There shall be no removal of film, when measured in accordance with
AAMA 2605, Clause 7.5.
v) Abrasion Test: The coating shall demonstrate a minimum value of 40 for the abrasion
coefficient, when tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.6.2.
vi) Adhesion: There shall be no removal of film or blistering, when measured in accordance
with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.4.
vii) Dry Film Hardness: A minimum pencil hardness of grade F (Berol Eagle Turquoise Pencil)
shall be obtained when the coating is tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.3.
viii) Salt Spray Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause
7.8.2 after an exposure period of 4000 hours.
ix) Humidity Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause
7.8.1 after an exposure period of 4,000 hours.
x) Mortar Resistance: Easy removal of mortar shall be obtained after 24 hours when tested
in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.2. In addition, there shall be no loss of film
adhesion or visual change in appearance.
xi) Muriatic Acid Resistance: The coating shall show no signs of attack when tested in
accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.1.
xii) Film Thickness: The minimum dry film thickness shall be 30 microns for solid colours and
40 microns for metallic colours, when measured in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause
4.3. The minimum local dry film thickness shall be increased to be consistent with colour
selection and type of coating as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Additionally,
the local dry film thickness shall be increased consistent with durability requirements and
environmental conditions, as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
xiii) Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60 degree Gardiner head shall
read 19% or less for ‘low gloss’, 20-79% for ‘medium gloss’ and 80% and over for ‘high
gloss’, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.2.
xiv) Spread of Flame: The PVDF coating, when tested to BS 476: Part 7 shall have a Class 1
rating.
xv) Building Regulations: The PVDF coating shall have a Class 0 rating as defined under the
Building Regulations.
Z32.2105 Product Tests

a) Product tests shall meet all the requirements of the Specification.
b) Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated
aluminium. Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat
coated/significant surface (as defined in BS EN ISO 2064) on which to conduct instrumental
measurements. The CA shall indicate exposed/significant surfaces.
c) Tests shall be performed on exposed/significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 and
shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2605.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
d) Test reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the CA. These
reports shall include:
i) Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
ii) Identification of the PVDF coating/system tested, including product supplier, colour
reference, product code and batch reference.
iii) Statement indicating that the PVDF coating/system tested passed all tests, or failed one
or more.
iv) In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
v) Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.
vi) Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
vii) The CA shall commission an independent inspecting authority with the Contractor
responsible for all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use,
carry out a minimum of three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures
and plans as set out in BS 6001: Part 1 for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable
Quality Level) = 1% on each colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall
be carried out at the finishing plant prior to fabrication by an independent consultant or
acceptance laboratory.
viii) Carry out a Site inspection since, due to damage or non-supply of the production test
reports, the CA shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed
units. This investigation shall be carried out within the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ
(Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) = 5%. For the purpose of this inspection each section in the
window curtain wall or other fabrication shall be taken as an individual component in
assessing the overall batch number to allow the acceptance inspection laboratory to
certify that the Works comply with the Specification. For units that are finished in fewer
than three production runs, acceptance inspections shall also be made using BS 6001:
Part 2 to the same LQ. The acceptance inspection laboratory shall be accepted by the
CA and instructed by the commissioning authority to submit all reports simultaneously to
the Contractor and the CA. These reports shall cover factory production materials and
Site-fixed units.
ix) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting
responsibility may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z33 ANODISING ..........................................................................................................2
Z33.2000 PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION ....................................................................... 2
Z33.2100 ALUMINIUM ANODISING ................................................................................................ 2

Z33.2101 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z33.2102 Workmanship ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z33.2103 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z33 ANODISING
Z33.2000 PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION
Z33.2100 ALUMINIUM ANODISING

Z33.2101 Materials
a) Aluminium anodising shall comply with BS 3987, unless specified otherwise. Provide a
certificate of assurance that each batch of anodising has been properly carried out.
b) The colour anodising process shall be agreed with the CA. Colouring of the anodic film shall be
achieved by use of a two-stage electrolytic process utilising cobalt or nickel as the colouring
metal or by use of a single stage integral process. On no account shall anodic films coloured by
the use of tin electrolytes be used. Any proposal by the Contractor for the use of an alternative
colouring technique can only be considered if the anodiser confirms in writing that the
alternative process will meet all of the visual, physical and documentary requirements detailed
within the Specification. Satisfactory independent evidence and samples will be required to
prove that an alternative colouring process will provide an equal or superior standard of
performance and life expectancy.
c) Colour control limits shall be submitted as samples with the Tender for review and comment by
the CA. The anodic finish shall be within these limits agreed and held by the CA.
d) All aluminium alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all
components is identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063, or acceptable equivalent,
and for sheet material grade J57S, or acceptable equivalent, and a certificate shall be obtained
from the material supplier stating the grade of material supplied.
e) Base metal batching shall be controlled in order that areas match. Critical visible areas shall be
from a single batch. Agree base metal batching with the CA in advance of production.
Z33.2102 Workmanship
a) Anodic oxidation coating shall be carried out at a single place of manufacture. All critical visible
areas shall be anodised in a single batch.
b) Anodising shall commence after fabrication/machining is complete wherever possible.
c) Any fabrication of pre-finished lengths shall be previously agreed with the CA. Uncoated edges
shall not be visible in assemblies or exposed to the atmosphere. Fabricated pieces shall meet
the thickness requirements of BS 3987.
d) The processes adopted shall be compatible, offering weather resistance, abrasion resistance,
impact resistance and protection against chemical attacks as follows:
i) Corrosion resistance shall be equal to or greater than that of an anodised aluminium finish
thickness of minimum average 25 microns and sealing in accordance with BS 3987 and
the Specification.
ii) For production control the abrasion resistance of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS 6161: Part 18. Films, which when tested by this method continue to
be scratched by glass coated abrasive paper do not conform to the Specification. In the
event of a dispute, the referee test described in BS EN 12373: Part 9 shall be carried out
on test pieces cut from eight components whose results from the abrasive paper test
indicate that they have suspect low abrasion resistance. The wear index obtained from the
referee test shall be no greater than 1.4, for acceptance.
iii) For production control the sealing value of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN 12373: Part 5. In the event of a dispute, the referee test
described in BS EN 12373: Part 7 shall be carried out. The maximum weight loss from
the referee test shall be no greater than 30mg/dm², for acceptance. Impregnated cold
sealing processes shall not be used.
iv) For production control the film thickness of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN ISO 2360. In the event of a dispute the referee test described in
BS EN ISO 1463 shall be carried out. The minimum local film thickness shall be 20
microns with a maximum of 35 microns.

rooflight system.
8/06/07
v) Anodic oxidation coating shall be carried out by the sulphuric acid bath process. The
temperatures of the anodising bath and chemical content shall be set and maintained to
achieve good quality control of the finished product in accordance with BS 3987.
vi) Notwithstanding BS 3987 visible surfaces shall be free from coating or metallurgical
defects when viewed from 1 metre.
e) The temperatures of the anodising bath and chemical content shall be set and maintained to
achieve good quality control of the finished product in accordance with BS 3987.
f) A quality control system for cleaning extrusion dies shall be adopted such that no lines appear
on the face of the extrusions. As a minimum check every 5th extrusion.
g) Rejected anodised extrusions shall only be reprocessed once.
h) Anodised finishes shall be within the control limits (established from range samples) or
standards accepted by the CA.
i) The finish shall be agreed with the CA from the range samples provided.
j) The finish shall be sealed in accordance with BS 3987.
k) Finishes shall be tested to BS EN 12373: Part 8.
l) Variation of final surface finish shall be limited to tolerances agreed with the CA prior to
commencement. If such variations do occur then such components that, in the opinion of the
CA, fail to achieve a uniform final surface finish shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
m) Lines produced at the location of die connection points shall only occur on non-visible surfaces
in the installed Works. The contact marks on sections resulting from electrical connection shall
not be on visible surfaces of the installed Works.
n) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall be
not less than 18 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
o) Repair of damage: Surface areas likely to be damaged during handling, fixing or by other
building trades shall be fully protected until completion of all other work in the area of the
installation. If during fixing or glazing any damage does occur, this shall be rectified immediately
and not left until the end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be carried out
with the CA’s acceptance and shall carry a 25 year guarantee for colour retention, avoidance of
discolouration and corrosion resistance.
Z33.2103 Testing
a) The CA shall commission an independent testing authority with the Contractor responsible for
all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use, carry out a minimum of
three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures and plans, as set out in BS
6001: Part 1, for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable Quality Level) = 1% on each
colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall be carried out at the finishing plant
prior to fabrication by a competent independent inspector from one of the approved
laboratories listed in the AASC technical information sheet No. 8.
b) Where there is damage or the production test reports have not been provided, the CA shall
commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units with the Contractor
being responsible for all costs in connection with such Site inspections. This investigation shall
be carried out within the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ (Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) =
5%. For the purpose of this inspection each section in the window curtain wall or other
fabrication shall be taken as an individual component in assessing the overall batch number to
allow the consultant to certify that the completed Contract complies with the Specification. For
units that are finished in fewer than three production runs, acceptance inspections shall also be
made using BS 6001: Part 2 to the same LQ.
c) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting responsibility
may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Contents
Z36 GASKETS ..............................................................................................................2
Z36.2100 MATERIALS TYPE AND USE........................................................................................... 2

Z36.2101 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2

rooflight system.
8/06/07
Z36 GASKETS
Z36.2100 MATERIALS TYPE AND USE

Z36.2101 Materials
a) The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.
b) All gaskets shall be of a type suited to the local climate, shall not melt in high temperatures and
shall be suited to all locations and conditions of use.
c) All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using
other materials shall not be acceptable. The gaskets shall perform and appear as a single
continuous material.
d) The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and moulded elements. These shall perform
and appear as a single element.
e) All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and select
all gaskets in order to:
i) Comply with the stipulations of BS 4255.
ii) Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
iii) Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid
materials and/or structural silicone.
iv) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Works.
f) Gaskets shall be free from contact with materials that have stain characteristics and be
compatible with all substrate, sealants and all other materials used in the Works.
g) Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs
are wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the Works and are compatible with all
other materials and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other
materials/components.
h) The colour of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.
i) Gaskets shall not shrink nor warp and shall not deteriorate between the periods stated in the
Contractor’s stated times for replacement.
j) Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanised in ladders.
k) The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation
performance.
l) Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to accommodate
fully the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the design, fabrication
and installation of the Works. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their
elastic qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and chemical attack, sufficient
to maintain the full acoustic performance of the Works.
m) Be responsible for ensuring that the glazing framework is effectively sealed to the building
structure to such an extent that the acoustic performance of the installation is equivalent to that
measured under the test conditions detailed in the Specification.
End of Section

rooflight system.
8/06/07

As SWRS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As SWRS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Central Market

A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION................................ 4

A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT............................................................................... 6

A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................ 6

A.4000 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................10

A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA.......................................................14

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/2 Foster and Partners

A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL.....................................................................................................18

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/3 Foster and Partners

A.1001 Specification Format

A.1002 Work Section Categories

A.1003 Supplemental Information

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/5 Foster and Partners

A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc

A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A.3101 General Requirements

A.3102 Contractor Responsibility

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/6 Foster and Partners

A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/7 Foster and Partners

iii) Details of any 'Specialist' involvement.

A.3104 The Detailed Design

A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/8 Foster and Partners

c) Where alternative sub-contractors/suppliers/products are proposed, they shall not be utilised

A.3106 Material Preferences

A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances

A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender

A.4002 Tender Submittals

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/10 Foster and Partners

A.4003 Post Contract Submittals

A.4004 Samples Generally

A.4005 Pre-contract Samples

A.4006 Post Contract Samples

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/11 Foster and Partners

A.4009 Quality Benchmarks

A.4010 Shop Drawings

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/12 Foster and Partners

A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/13 Foster and Partners

A.4013 Review of Submittals

A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA

A.5101 Performance Requirements

A.5200 Design and Service Life

A.5202 Service Life of Components

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/14 Foster and Partners

A.5301 Movements and Tolerances

A.5302 Dead Loads

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/15 Foster and Partners

A.5303 Live Loads

A.5305 Wind Loads

A.5306 Preceding Work

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/16 Foster and Partners

A.5400 Environmental Conditions

A.5402 Psychrometric Data

A.5500 Fire and Smoke Stops

A.5501 General Requirements

A.5600 Corrosion Protection

Architectural Specification - Souk - Wall and A/17 Foster and Partners

i) External corrosion category:

A.5602 Galvanising Corrosion Protection

A.5603 Electrolytic Protection